docappendix a - Ellisdale Construction
download 
Report Transcription
appendix a - Ellisdale Construction
APPENDIX ‘A’ – Playground Equipment Contacts: Jolean Boyer Corporate Accounts Inside Sales Rep 800-325-8828, ext 7390 [email protected] Proposal Preparation Order Processing Installation Coordination Process for new builds: 1. 2. Contact Jolean Boyer to receive proposal for playground equipment, turf surfacing, freight, and estimated taxes for the site. Installation can also be quoted upon request for both the playground equipment and the turf fall zone surfacing. a. Please note that the site preparation is not included in these quotes. The site preparation is the responsibility of the general contractor, but information is readily available and provided for specifications. b. Electronic CAD drawings are requested to insure there is sufficient area to accommodate the fall zone areas required for the equipment specified. This also provides an equipment placement guide for installers. c. 2-D drawings are provided with every order and color 3-Ds are available upon request. In addition, a copy of the in house order is forwarded with the hard copy drawings. Order Lead Times – Shipping Transit time not included a. Orders without turf surfacing = 3 weeks b. Orders including turf surfacing = 5 weeks c. Orders are placed upon receipt of signed contract and approved credit application Customer Service: 1. 2. Contact Jamie Meadows to report any customer service issues on site before or during new builds. Electronic photos are appreciated and required in some instances. Every effort is made to get parts to the site before completion. If that is not possible, clarification will be requested on where and when to send parts Jamie Meadows also processes all warranty claims and tracks shipments with freight companies as well as any small charge parts orders. Signed proposals are required for orders placed that reflect a charge to the customer. LITTLE TIKES COMMERCIAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTIONS Please note: Not all components are necessarily used in your individual site plan. Clever Climber –ALL OUT Appendix ‘A’ 1 •This clever climber is newly released and replaces the Little Tikes Commercial Playcenter5. Packed full of updates our new clever climbers bridge the gap between learning and play! (SeFigure 1)e Clever Climber –CUT LOOSE •This clever climber is newly released and replaces the Little Tikes PlayCenter4. (See Figure 2) Tot Tree– •Offers multiple activities to promote healthy development. Perceptual Cognitive Learning, Social Linguistic, Motor Skills and Exploration (SeFigure 3)e Harry the Hippo –Animal Sculpture •Great climbing & imaginative play for ages 2-5 (See Figure 4) Calvin the Caterpillar –Animal Sculpture •Great climbing & imaginative play for ages 2-5 (See Figure 5) Frog –Animal Sculpture •Great climbing & imaginative play for ages 2-5 (See Figure 6) Dinosaur –Animal Sculpture •Great climbing & imaginative play for ages 2-5 (See Figure 7) Bulldozer w/C-Spring –Spring Rider •Spring Rider for ages 2-5 (See Figure 8) ATV w/C-Spring –Spring Rider •Spring Rider for ages 2-5 (See Figure 9) Four Seat Teeter –Spring Rider •Four-seated four way spring rider (See Figure 10) Garden GrubbiesSpring Rider –Gallagher •Two-seated grasshopper rider (See Figure 11) Garden GrubbiesSpring Rider –Nectar •Two-seat bumble bee rider (See Figure 12) Jr. Picnic Table •Tough steel frame, smooth flat surface (See Figure 13) Heritage Bench with Back •6’Park Bench with back (See Figure 14) Appendix ‘A’ 2 Figure 1 Figure 2 Figure 6 Figure 11 Figure 7 Figure 12 Figure 3 Figure 8 Figure 4 Figure 9 Figure 5 Figure 10 Figure 13 Figure 13 Appendix ‘A’ 3 APPENDIX 'B' – HARMFUL PLANT LIST Harmful Plant List From The Children's Hospital Of Pittsburg. Plants in this list shall not be used anywhere on this project, either inside the play area fencing, outside the fencing, or anywhere within the site boundaries. If such plant species exist on site prior to construction, all such material shall be removed. Scientific Name Common Name Anemone Angle Trumpet Tree Apple Arrowhead Avocado Leaves Betel Nut Palm Bird-of-Paradise Shrub Black Locust, White Locust Buckeye Buttercups Castor Oil Plant, Castor Bean Choke Cherry Common Privet, etc… Crocus - Autumn Daffodil, Jonquil Daphne Deadly nightshade Devil’s Ivy Dumb cane, Elephant ear Elderberry Elephant Ear Elephant Ear English Ivy European Bittersweet, Deadly Nightshade Fancy-leaf Caladium Four O’Clock Foxglove Golden Dewdrop, pigeonberry, Holly, etc… Horsetail Reed Hyacinth Hydrangea Iris Ivy…Boston, English, etc… Jack-in-the-Pulpit Jasmine, Jessamine Jequirity Bean Jerusalem Cherry Jimsonweed, Thorn Apple, Juniper Angel’s Trumpet Lantana, Bunchberry, Red Sage Larkspur, Crowfoot Malus sylvestris Caesalpina gilliesii Robinia psuedocacia Prunus virginiana Lingstrum species Narcissus Daphne mesereum Alroba belladonna Dieffenbachia Colacasia Philodendron Hedera Helix Solanum dulcamara Caladium Digitalis Duranta Erecta Ilex species Hyacinthus orientalis Hydrangea macrophylia Iris Arisaema tryphyllum Solanum pseudocapsicum Datura stramonium Juniperus Conferta Lantana Delphinium APPENDIX B-1 Children of America CITY, STATE Issue Date. 08.10.10 Version 2.0 HARMFUL PLANT LIST FORM Laurels Convallaria majalis Lily of the Valley Lobelia Marijuana Mayapple, Mandrake, Ground Lemon Mistletoe Monkshood Moonflower, Angel’s Trumpet, Locoweed Moonseed Morning Glory Oleander Peach, Plum, Cherry, Apricot Periwinkle Peyote (mescal) Philodendron Poison Hemlock, False Parsley Poison Ivy Poison Oak Pokeweed, Inkberry Poppy (California Poppy exempted) Potato Sprouts Primrose Ranunculus Rhododendron, Azalea Rhubarb Spanish Stopper Star of Bethlehem Sweet Pea Swiss Cheese Plant, Ceriman Tobacco Tomato Vines Tulip Virginia Creeper, American Ivy Water Hemlock, Spotted Cowbane Wisteria Yellow jJessamine, Carolina Jessamine Yew (Japanese) Podophyllum peltatum Datura meteloides Ipomoea violacea Nerum oleander Prunus species Conium maculatum Phytolacca americana Rhododendron Rheum rhabarbarum Eugenia Foetida Lathyrus odoratus Monstera Parthenocissus quinquefolia Cicuta maculata Wisteria species Gelsemium sempervirens Taxus END OF APPENDIX APPENDIX B-2 Children of America CITY, STATE Issue Date. 08.10.10 Version 2.0 HARMFUL PLANT LIST FORM PROJECT MANUAL & SPECIFICATIONS FOR Children of America Street City, State, Zip Date 09.03.09 Version 1.01 BUILDING OWNER Name Street City, State, Zip TENANT Children of America 5300 West Atlantic Avenue Suite 700 Delray Beach, FL 33484 ARCHITECT Name Firm Name Street City, State, Zip CIVIL ENGINEER Name Firm Name Street City, State, Zip SECTION 00001 - TABLE OF CONTENTS Introductory Information 00001 00002 00007 00015 00220 00700 Table of Contents Project Directory Seals Page List of Drawings Geotechnical Data General Conditions Division 1 — General Requirements 01000 General Notes and Conditions 01010 Summary of Work 01045 Cutting and Patching 01100 Project Procedures 01330 Submittal Procedures 01500 Temporary Facilities and Project Sign 01600 Product Requirements 01700 Project Closeout Division 2 — Site Construction 02110 Site Clearing 02200 Earthwork 02361 Termite Control 02510 Asphalt Concrete Paving 02520 Portland Cement Concrete Paving 02660 Water Distribution 02720 Storm Sewerage 02730 Sanitary Sewerage 02880 Playground Equipment and Structures 02900 Landscaping Division 3 — Concrete 03300 Casts-in-Place Concrete Division 4 — Masonry 04200 Unit Masonry Division 5 — Metals 05120 05500 Structural Steel Metal Fabrications Division 6 — Wood and Plastics 06100 Rough Carpentry 06192 Prefabricated Wood Trusses 06200 Finish Carpentry Division 7 — Thermal and Moisture Protection 07200 Insulation 07310 Shingles 07530 SBS Modified Bituminous Roofing 07600 Flashing and Sheet Metal 07900 Joint Sealers 00001 - 1 Children of America Issue Date 09.03.09 Version 1.01 TABLE OF CONTENTS Division 8 — Doors and Windows 08110 Steel Doors and Frames 08305 Access Doors 08620 Vinyl Windows 08700 Finish Hardware 08700ƒ Hardware Schedule 08810 Glass and Glazing Division 9 — Finishes 09250 09510 09650 09680 09900 09986 Gypsum Wallboard Acoustical Ceilings Resilient Flooring Carpet Painting and Coatings Sanitary Wall Finishes Division 10 — Specialties 10522 10800 Fire Extinguishers and Cabinets Toilet Accessories Division 11 — Equipment 11050 FF&E Items Division 12 — Furnishings 12500 Window Treatment Division 13 — Special Construction 13851 Fire Alarm System 13900 Fire Suppression System Division 14 — Conveying Systems Not Used Division 15 — Mechanical 15400 15500 Plumbing Fixtures and Equipment Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Division 16 — Electrical 16000 16510 Electrical Lighting END OF SECTION 00001 - 2 Children of America Issue Date 09.03.09 Version 1.01 TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION 00002 - PROJECT DIRECTORY ARCHITECT Firm Name Street City, State, Zip Telephone: (000) 000-0000 FAX: (000) 000-0000 ARCHITECT-OF-RECORD Name State License Number: 00000 LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT Name Street City, State, Zip Telephone: (000) 000-0000 Fax: (000) 000-0000 LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT-OF-RECORD Name State License Number: 00000 CIVIL ENGINEER Name Street City, State, Zip Telephone: (000) 000-0000 Fax: (000) 000-0000 CIVIL ENGINEER-OF-RECORD Name State License Number: 00000 STRUCTURAL ENGINEER Name Street City, State, Zip Telephone: (000) 000-0000 Fax: (000) 000-0000 STRUCTURAL ENGINEER-OF-RECORD Name State License Number: 00000 00002 - 1 Children of America Issue Date 09.03.09 Version 1.01 PROJECT DIRECTORY FORM MECHANICAL ENGINEER Name Street City, State, Zip Telephone: (000) 000-0000 Fax: (000) 000-0000 MECHANICAL ENGINEER-OF-RECORD Name State License Number: 00000 ELECTRICAL ENGINEER Name Street City, State, Zip Telephone: (000) 000-0000 Fax: (000) 000-0000 ELECTRICAL ENGINEER-OF-RECORD Name State License Number: 00000 [OTHER] ENGINEER Name Street City, State, Zip Telephone: (000) 000-0000 Fax: (000) 000-0000 [OTHER] ENGINEER-OF-RECORD Name State License Number: 00000 END OF DOCUMENT 00002 - 2 Children of America Issue Date 09.03.09 Version 1.01 PROJECT DIRECTORY FORM SECTION 00007 - SEALS PAGE PROJECT Project Name: Location: Children of America Street City, State ARCHITECT OF RECORD SEAL Name Firm Name Street City, State, Zip State License Number 00000 Signature Date CIVIL ENGINEER OF RECORD SEAL Name, PE Firm Name Street City, State, Zip State License Number 00000 Signature Date STRUCTURAL ENGINEER OF RECORD SEAL Name, PE Firm Name Street City, State, Zip State License Number 00000 00007 - 1 Children of America Issue Date 09.03.09 Version 1.01 SEALS PAGE FORM Signature MECHANICAL ENGINEER OF RECORD Date SEAL Name, PE Firm Name Street City, State, Zip State License Number 00000 Signature Date ELECTRICAL ENGINEER OF RECORD SEAL Name, PE Firm Name Street City, State, Zip State License Number 00000 Signature Date [OTHER] ENGINEER OF RECORD SEAL Name, PE Firm Name Street City, State, Zip State License Number 00000 Signature Date END OF DOCUMENT 00007 - 2 Children of America Issue Date 09.03.09 Version 1.01 SEALS PAGE FORM SECTION 00015 – LIST OF DRAWINGS Title Sheets A0.1 A0.2 A0.3 Issue Date / Last Revision Date 00.00.00 00.00.00 00.00.00 Title & Index Sheet Interior & Exterior Signage ADA Details Site Documents C1.1 Site Plan C2.1 Grading Plan C3.1 Utility Plan C4.1 Site Lighting & Photometric Plan C5.1 Site Details C5.2 Site Details [L1.1 Landscape Plan 00.00.00 00.00.00 00.00.00 00.00.00 00.00.00 00.00.00 00.00.00] Structural Documents S1 Foundation Plan S2 Roof Framing Plan S3 General Notes S4 Structural Details S5 Structural Details S6 Structural Details 00.00.00 00.00.00 00.00.00 00.00.00 00.00.00 00.00.00 Architectural Documents A1.1 Floor Plan A1.2 Floor and Wall Finishes Plan A1.3 Furniture Plan A1.4 Dimension Plan A2.1 Reflected Ceiling Plan A3.1 Roof Plan A4.1 Exterior Elevations A4.2 Exterior Elevations A5.1 Playground Equipment Plan A6.1 Wall Sections A6.2 Wall Sections A6.3 Wall Sections/ Details A7.1 City Place A7.2 City Place A8.1 Interior Elevations A8.2 Casework & Interior Elevations A8.3 Furniture Details A9.1 Schedules & Details A9.2 Finish Schedules & Details A10.1 Fire Exit Plan A10.2 Square Footage Plan Mechanical Documents M1 HVAC Notes M2 HVAC Plan M3 HVAC Gas Plan & Gas Isometric M4 HVAC Details M5 HVAC Details M6 HVAC Details 00.00.00 00.00.00 00.00.00 00.00.00 00.00.00 00.00.00 00.00.00 00.00.00 00.00.00 00.00.00 00.00.00 00.00.00 00.00.00 00.00.00 00.00.00 00.00.00 00.00.00 00.00.00 00.00.00 00.00.00 00.00.00 00.00.00 00.00.00 00.00.00 00.00.00 00015 - 1 Children of America Issue Date 09.03.09 Version 1.01 LIST OF DRAWING FORM Plumbing Documents P1 Sanitary Floor Plan P2 Water Distribution Plan 00.00.00 00.00.00 Electrical Documents E1 Lighting Plan E2 Power Plan E3 Electrical Schedule & Notes 00.00.00 00.00.00 00.00.00 END OF SECTION 00015 - 2 Children of America Issue Date 09.03.09 Version 1.01 LIST OF DRAWING FORM SECTION 00220 – GEOTECHNICAL DATA PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 A. B. RELATED DOCUMENTS: The Geotechnical Data report (Soil Report) is included by reference and is made part of these Construction Documents 1. [Soil Report Name] 2. [Soil Report Author] 3. [Soil Report Project Number] 4. [Soil Report Date] If the Soil Report is not attached to this set of Specifications, a copy is available at the following locations: 1. Owner (000) 000-0000 2. Soils Engineer (000) 000-0000 4. Architect (000) 000-0000 PART 2 - PRODUCTS A. Not applicable PART 3 - EXECUTION A. All recommendations and procedures outlined or detailed in the Soil Report shall be followed by the Contractor. Conditional recommendations shall be implemented with approval of the Architect and Soils Engineer. B. The services of a Soil Engineer shall be retained for the duration of the construction of this Project. Soil and Testing services shall include, but not be limited to, the following tasks: 1. Field consulting of topsoil stripping 2. Field consulting of soil compaction 3. Field consulting of proof rolling operations 4. Field testing of structural fill material 5. Field testing of soil bearing capacity 6. Field recommendations for dewatering operations END OF SECTION 00220 - 1 Children of America Issue Date 08.10.10 Version 2.0 GEOTECHNICAL DATA SECTION 00700 - GENERAL CONDITIONS PART 1 - GENERAL A. The General Conditions are the terms and conditions for this construction contract. All materials and labor supplied therein are detailed in AIA Document A201-2007 General Conditions of the Contract for Construction. All contractors, suppliers, vendors and subcontractors and others contractually obligated to provide materials or labor on this Project are hereby advised that their work shall conform with the requirements of this Document, whether or not included in this Project Manual, B. The General Conditions contained in AIA Document A201-2007 General Conditions of the Contract for Construction shall be considered the minimum acceptable standard used by the Architect to judge the responsibilities of the parties and their performance, compliance, quality and acceptability of all Work provided therein. C. The Architect and Children of America will judge all Work related to this Project D. These specifications and the accompanying drawings shall be subject of all requirements stated in these General Conditions and shall form the body of documents, consisting of drawings, specifications, and forms of agreements, to be known collectively as the Contract Documents. E. The General Conditions contained in the document AIA Document A201 - 2007 General Conditions of the Contract for Construction are included by reference in these Contract Documents without modification, edit, or additions. Only first page of the General Conditions is attached to these specifications. Complete versions of the General Conditions are available at the following sources: 1. 2. 3. American Institute of Architects, Washington, D.C., 800.242.3837; Extension 4 Insert Architects name, address, and phone number. Local AIA Offices, bookstores, or architectural printing service shops. PART 2 - PRODUCTS - Not Applicable To This Section PART 3 - EXECUTION - Not Applicable To This Section END OF DOCUMENT 00700 - 1 Children of America Issue Date 08.10.10 Version 2.0 GENERAL CONDITIONS SECTION 01000- GENERAL NOTES & CONDITIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 COMPLIANCE A. All construction shall comply with applicable local, state and federal codes, rules, and regulations, and other entities having jurisdiction. Any discrepancy between local, state or federal building codes, rules and regulations and work built, or work delineated in these Contract Documents shall be corrected to full compliance with such rules, regulations, or codes. B. All clearances, door sizes, hardware locations knob types, restroom equipment, mounting heights, and all other dimensions, heights, locations, and clearances shall comply with Title III of the Americans With Disabilities Act of 1990 (ADA); and Americans With Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities: Building Elements Designed for Children's Use: Final Rule; January 13, 1998 (36 CFR Part 1191); and ICC/ANSI A117.1-2003 Accessible & Usable Buildings And Facilities; and ADA Amendments Act of 2008, and all local or state adopted handicapped accessibility codes. C. Utility connections and services shall be coordinated with the utility companies having jurisdiction, and shall comply with the rules, regulations, and codes of the utility companies or the prevailing authority having jurisdiction. D. Contractor is responsible for obtaining and paying for all building permits and related permits, fees, and approvals required by state, or local building authorities; utilities; or other regulatory agencies. E. Contractors, Suppliers, and Subcontractors shall build the work described in these Contract Documents exactly as shown herein. If any inconsistency, error, or omission in the Contract Documents is discovered, such information shall be documented and submitted to the Architect as a notification in writing within 10 days of its discovery. The Architect's reply in writing to this notification of inconsistency, error, or omission is a prerequisite to any action concerning the claimed inconsistency, error or omission and any subsequent action taken to deviate from the work shown in the Contract Documents. F. If Changes are required in the work that differ from the conditions shown in these Contract Documents, such changes shall be submitted as a written Proposal to the Architect and Children of America for written approval in the form of a Change Order. Any Changes made without the specific written consent of Children of America shall be considered as unauthorized changes, not in compliance with the Contract Documents, and excluded from any responsibility of Children of America either during construction or after occupancy. G. Changes in the Work, not approved in writing by the Architect, shall be removed and replaced with correct Work at the sole expense of the Contractor, Subcontractor, and Supplier, but in no case shall the full cost, any portion of the cost, or any consequential cost, of removal and replacement of such non-conforming work be at the expense of the Architect or Children of America. PART 2 - PRODUCTS - Not Applicable To This Section PART 3 - EXECUTION - Not Applicable To This Section END OF SECTION 01000 - 1 Children of America Issue Date 08.10.10 Version 2.0 GENERAL NOTES & CONDITIONS SECTION 01010 - SUMMARY OF WORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Project identification: CHILDREN OF AMERICA Street City, State B. Building Owner: – City Street City, State, Zip Contact: Name Phone: (000) 000-0000 C. Tenant: CHILDREN OF AMERICA 5300 West Atlantic Ave. Delray Beach, FL 33484 D. Project summary: New construction of one-story pre-school facility. Structural wood frame with structural wood wall sheathing; pre-engineered wood roof trusses; reinforced concrete slab on grade, concrete foundation system, modular size brick veneer and EFIS exterior finish, EPDM roofing, inoperable vinyl-clad windows, manufactured aluminum gutter-downspout system, resilient vinyl composition floor tile, direct glue-down carpet, drywall walls and ceilings, suspended acoustic tile ceiling. An automatic fire suppression system throughout the building, regardless of local code. Plumbing, heating, cooling, ventilating, electrical, and signal systems. Site improvements including, concrete sidewalks, ramps, curbs, asphalt paving, landscaping, sodding and seeding, playground site preparation pad and drainage, playground equipment and turf, fencing, site lighting, trash-dumpster enclosure and pad all utilities and drainage. E. Particular project requirements: Existing site conditions and restrictions: Building floor elevation to be set at an elevation to permit continuous and positive site drainage, and maintain an Accessible Route from all points on the project site to all points in the building interior, and as delineated on the civil engineering drawings. The playground area is to have a grade of no more than 2% in any direction. F. Building Data Summary: 1. Total Gross Building Area: 2. Total Net Building Area: 3. Net Classroom Area: 4. Building height: 5. Number of exits: 6. Maximum travel distance to any exit: 7. Corridor width: 8. Interior Finishes: 9. Glass & Glazing: 10. Occupancy Data: a. Students < 36 months old 01010 - 1 Children of America Contact: [Project Manager] Phone: (561) 999-0710 [0,000] sf (outside face of masonry) [0,000] sf (outside face of sheathing) [0,000] sf 28-0” one story [00 ] 100 ft 60 inches Class B throughout Safety tempered throughout Issue Date 08.010.010 Version 2.0 [00] SUMMARY OF WORK b. Students > 36 months old [00] c. Total Students [000] d. Total Staff [00] e. Total Building Occupant Load [000] 11. Plumbing Fixture Data: a. WC-1 Training Toilet (10”) [0] b. WC-2 Children’s HC Toilet (14”) [0] c. WC-3 Adult HC Toilet (17”) [0] d. L-1 Wall-hung Child’s Lavatory [00] e. L-2 Wall-hung Adult Lavatory [0] f. S-1 Self-rimming Lavatory [0] g. S-2 Kitchen sink- triple basin [0] h. S-3 MS Janitor’s mop sink [0] i. DF-1 Electric water cooler [0] j. OF-1 Drinking fountain [0] k. GS Grease separator [0] H. Permits: Contractor shall apply for, obtain, and pay for all permits required to perform the Work. Submit copies of all permits to Architect and Owner. I. Building Code Compliance summary: Note: Based on International Building Code 2009 1. Occupancy Group & Construction Type: Occupancy Classification IBC Group E Day Care Facility; Construction IBC Type V-B, Combustible construction. J. Codes: Comply with all Federal, State and local codes and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction, including, but not limited to the following listing of codes and regulations: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. International Building Code (IBC) 2009 ICC/ANSI A117.1-2003 Accessible & Usable Buildings 2003 National Electrical Code (NEC) 2005 International Mechanical Code (IMC) 2009 International Energy Conservation Code (IECC) 2009 International Plumbing Code (IPC) 2009 International Fuel Gas Code (IFGC) 2009 International Fire Code (IFC) 2009 NFPA 13 – Installation of Fire Sprinkler Systems 2007 NFPA 54 – National Fuel Gas Code (ANSI Z-233.1) 2006 NFPA 70 – National Electrical Code (NEC 2008) 2008 NFPA 72 – National Fire Alarm Code 2007 NFPA 90A – Installation of Air Conditioning & Ventilating Systems 2009 NFPA 90B – Installation of Warm Air Heating & Air Conditioning Systems 2009 15. NFPA 101 – 2009 Life Safety Code 2009 1990 16. Americans With Disabilities Act (ADA) 17. Americans With Disabilities Act Amendments Act of 2008 (ADA) 2008 18. Americans With Disabilities Act (ADA) Facilities For Children's Use Final Rule 1998 [19. Insert State Day Care licensing regulations - Check with National Resource Center for Health and Safety in Child Care for rules 1-800-598-5437 ] K. Submit copies of all inspection reports, notices and similar communications from authorities to Architect and Owner. 01010 - 2 Children of America Issue Date 08.010.010 Version 2.0 SUMMARY OF WORK L. Dimensions: Verify dimensions indicated on Drawings with field dimensions before fabrication or ordering of materials. Do not scale Drawings. M. Discrepancies: Notify Architect of conditions differing from those indicated on the drawings or discrepancies within the drawings. Do not proceed without fully resolving such conditions or discrepancies. See Section 01000. N. Definitions for terms used in the specifications: 1. Provide: Furnish, fabricate, supply and install, complete with all necessary accessories, parts, and components, ready for intended use. Pay for all related costs. 2. Approved: Acceptance of item submitted for purposes of use in the Project.. Not a limitation or release for compliance with the Contract Documents or regulatory requirements. Refer to limitations of ‘Approved’ in General Conditions. 3. Match Existing: Match a specific existing condition identified by and acceptable to the Architect. O. Intent: Drawings and specifications are intended to provide the basis for proper completion of the Work suitable for the intended use by the Owner. Anything not expressly set forth but which is reasonable, implied, or necessary for proper performance of the Project shall be included in the Work at no additional cost to the Owner, and within the Project time limits. P. Writing style: Specifications are written in the imperative mode. Except where specifically intended otherwise, the subject of all imperative statements is the Contractor. For example, ‘Provide tile’ means ‘Contractor shall provide tile.’ PART 2 - PRODUCTS - Not Applicable To This Section PART 3 - EXECUTION - Not Applicable To This Section END OF SECTION 01010 - 3 Children of America Issue Date 08.010.010 Version 2.0 SUMMARY OF WORK SECTION 01045 - CUTTING AND PATCHING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 A. SUMMARY Provide cutting and patching work to properly complete the Work of the Project, complying with requirements for: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. B. Structural work. Mechanical/electrical systems. Visual requirements, including detailing and tolerances. Operational and safety limitations. Fire resistance ratings. Inspection, preparation, and performance. Cleaning. Do not cut and patch in a manner that would result in a failure of the work to perform as intended, decreased energy performance, increased maintenance, decreased operational life, or decreased safety. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 A. MATERIALS Match existing materials for cutting and patching work with new materials conforming to project requirements. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Inspect conditions prior to work to identify scope and type of work required. Protect adjacent work. Notify Owner of work requiring interruption to building services or Owner’s operations. B. Perform work with workmen skilled in the trades involved. Prepare sample area of each type of work for approval. C. Cutting: Use cutting tools, not chopping tools. Make neat holes. Minimize damage to adjacent work. Check for concealed utilities and structure before cutting. D. Patching: Make patches, seams, and joints durable and inconspicuous. Comply with tolerances for new work. E. Clean work area and areas affected by cutting and patching operations. END OF SECTION 01045 - 1 CHILDREN OF AMERICA Issue Date 08.10.10 Version 2.0 CUTTING & PATCHING SECTION 01100 - PROJECT PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Provide coordination of work. 1. Supervisory personnel. 2. Pre-construction conference. 3. Detailed Construction Progress Schedule 3. Monthly meetings; distribute minutes. 4. Other meetings. B. Prior to start of construction; submit a construction progress schedule for the entire construction process from start to final occupancy. Schedule can be in any standard format such as task-bar charts, CPM flow charts, or other suitable format. Contractor shall review and update this schedule monthly. 1. Children of America shall rely on the accuracy of the Construction Schedule for delivery and installation of furnishings, fixtures, electronics, coordination and training operations, final occupancy and grand openings. The Contractor shall advise Children of America of any change or deviation in such schedules. NOTE: The contractor is to notify the Children of America project manager 14 2. days prior to the layout of all building walls. The COA project manager will need to be on site at the time of layout to confirm the square footage of all classrooms. C. General Contractor shall maintain daily and special reports on the project site. 1. Provide weekly progress reports with digital photos to the Children of America Project Manager. D. Prepare submittal schedule. E. Submit schedule of required tests including payment and responsibility. F. Perform surveys: 1. Laying out the work and verifying locations during construction. 2. Surveying of off-site work 2. Final site situation survey. G. Submit and post a list of emergency telephone numbers and address for individuals to be contacted in case of emergency. H. Maintain on-site record drawings and specifications; Make annotations and other field notations as required as work progresses. Preserve such documents for final submittal of As-Built documents. I. Perform quality control during installation. J. Cleaning During Construction: 1. Maintain areas free of waste materials, debris, and rubbish. Maintain site in a clean and orderly condition. 2. Remove debris and rubbish from pipe chases, plenums, attics, crawl spaces, and other closed or remote spaces, prior to enclosing the space. 3. Broom and vacuum clean interior areas prior to start of surface finishing, and continue cleaning to eliminate dust. 01100 - 1 Children of America Issue Date 08.10.10 Version 2.0 PROJECT PROCEDURES 4. Collect and remove waste materials, debris, and rubbish from site in a manner acceptable to local environmental regulations. PART 2 - PRODUCTS - Not Applicable To This Section PART 3 - EXECUTION - Not Applicable To This Section END OF SECTION 01100 - 2 Children of America Issue Date 08.10.10 Version 2.0 PROJECT PROCEDURES SECTION 01300 – SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. B. Comply with project format for submittals. Provide Architect with types of submittals listed in individual sections and number of copies required. Architect will retain one (1) of each for records. 1. Shop drawings, prior review by Contractor - minimum 3 copies. 2. Product data - minimum 3 copies. 3. Samples – 1 each, plus extra samples as required to indicate range of color, finish, and texture to be expected. 4. Mock-ups - when required in the individual sections. 5. Inspection and test reports - minimum 3 copies. 6. Warranties - minimum 3 copies. 7. Survey data - minimum 3 copies. 8. Closeout submittals - minimum 3 copies. C. Provide warranties as specified; warranties shall not limit length of time for remedy of damages Owner may have by legal statute. Warranties shall be signed by contractor, supplier or installer responsible for performance of warranty. A preliminary or sample warranty shall be included with all items requiring warranty submittals for review under this Section. Warranty documents shall be submitted for review for the following minimum items: 1. Termite Treatment. 2. Shingles 3. Modified Bitumen Roofing 4. Windows 5. Doors 6. Water Heater, Mixing Valves, Recirculation Pumps 7. Heating and Cooling Equipment 8. Fans and Ventilation Equipment PART 2 - PRODUCTS - Not Applicable To This Section PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01. Schedule of Submittals : Within 30 days after receiving a notice to proceed, the contractor must complete the Schedule of Submittals, included in Paragraph 1.01 in this Section, in duplicate, listing all items that must be furnished for review and approval by the Architect. The schedule must indicate the type of items (such as sample, shop drawings, catalog cut, etc.) and include the scheduled dates of submittal. In preparing the schedule, adequate time must be allowed for Architect's review and approval and possible resubmittal. Also, the schedule must be coordinated with the approved construction progress chart. The contractor must revise and/or update the schedule as directed. Such revised schedules must be made available to the Architect, Owner, and a Children of America Project Representative for monitoring. 3.02. Shop Drawings and Related Data : Submittal of shop drawings and related data must conform to the requirements specified in this Section. If approved by the Architect, the shop drawing will be identified as having received approval by being so stamped and dated. The contractor must make any corrections required by the Architect. If the contractor considers any correction indicated on the submittal drawings to constitute a 01330 - 1 Children of America Issue Date 08.10.10 Version 2.0 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES change to the contract drawings or specifications, notice must be given to the Architect in writing. Unless otherwise noted or discussed and agreed, the minimum number of prints (see above) of all approved shop drawings must be given to the Architect. The approval of the submittals and shop drawings by the Architect shall not be construed as a complete checking of the fit, finish, and integration of the product, but instead indicates only that the general method of construction, design concepts, and detailing are satisfactory. Approval of the shop drawings does not relieve the contractor of responsibility for any error that may exist because the contractor is responsible for the dimensions and design of adequate connections and details and for satisfactory construction of all work. The submission by the contractor must be accompanied by a transmittal letter or other specific letter indicate the contents of the submittal, and the name, address and phone number of the supplier or subcontractor. 3.03. Mechanical Room and Roof Equipment Area Layout Requirements: The contractor must prepare and submit Mechanical room and Roof equipment area layout drawings for areas where equipment proposed for use could present interface or space difficulties. Such layout drawings must be submitted not less than 30 days in advance of actual installation of such equipment, and must conform to the specified requirements for shop drawings. Submittals describing the various mechanical and electrical equipment items that are to be installed in the areas represented by the layout drawings must be assembled and submitted concurrently and must be accompanied by the room or area layout drawings. All mechanical and electrical equipment and accessories must be shown to scale in the plan and also in elevation or section in their installation positions. Ductwork and piping must be shown 3.04 Material, Equipment, and Fixture Lists: Lists of equipment and fixtures must be submitted by the contractor in accordance with the requirements specified for shop drawings. The lists must be supported by sufficient descriptive material, such as catalogs, cuts, diagrams, and other data published by the manufacturer, as well as by evidence of compliance with safety and performance standards, to demonstrate conformance to the specification requirements. Catalog numbers alone are not acceptable. The data must include the name and address of the nearest service and maintenance organization that regularly stocks repair parts. 3.05. Certificates of Compliance: Any certificates required for demonstrating proof of compliance of materials with specification requirements, including mail certificates, statements of application, and extended guarantees, must be signed and submitted to the Architect at least 10 days before delivery. The contractor must review all certificates before submissions are made to the Architect, to ensure compliance with the specification requirements and to ensure that the affidavit is properly signed. Each certificate must be signed by an official authorized to certify on behalf of the manufacturing company and must contain the name and address of the contractor, the project name and location, and the quantity and date or dates of shipment or delivery to which the certificates apply. Copies of laboratory test reports submitted with certificates must contain the name and address of the testing laboratory and the dates of tests to which the report applies. Certification must not be construed as relieving the contractor from furnishing satisfactory material if, after tests are performed on selected samples, the material is found not to meet the specific requirements 3.06 Architect's Review of Submittal A. When submittals are reviewed by the Architect each submittal shall be returned to the contractor stamped or otherwise indicated by the Architect in one of the following ways: 01330 - 2 Children of America Issue Date 08.10.10 Version 2.0 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 1. 2. 3. 4. APPROVED: The contractor is advised that fabrication, manufacture, or construction of the submitted work may proceed, provided the work complies with the contract documents. APPROVED AS NOTED: The contractor is advised that fabrication, manufacture, or construction may proceed, provided the work complies with the Architect's notations on the submittal and that the work complies with the contract documents.. REVISE & RESUBMIT: The contractor is advised that no work may be fabricated, manufactured, or constructed and that the contractor must make a new submittal to the Architect. Any submission marked "REVISE & RESUBMIT" is not permitted on the site NOT APPROVED: The contractor is advised that the submittal does not meet the requirements of the specification, the drawings, or other requirements of the Contract Documents and will not be reviewed or commented upon further. B. The Architect will return marked-up reproducibles if included in the submittal. The contractor is responsible for obtaining prints and for distributing such marked-up drawings to the field and to subcontractors C. In the case of shop drawings in the form of manufacturers' descriptive literature, catalog cuts, and brochures the Architect shall return APPROVED or APPROVED AS NOTED copies to the contractor, who is responsible for distributing them to the field and to the subcontractors. If the shop drawings are stamped REVISE & RESUBMIT the Architect will return stamped copies to the contractor, who shall submit new shop drawings to the Architect D. In the case of samples stamped APPROVED or APPROVED AS NOTED the Architect shall return one of the samples to the contractor. In the case of samples stamped REVISE & RESUBMIT the Architect shall return Children of America all of the submitted samples 3.07 Parts Data: Spare parts data shall be submitted to the School Project Representative for review and comments. If acceptable to Children of America, the Spare Parts Data shall be included in the O & M Manuals 01330 - 3 Children of America Issue Date 08.10.10 Version 2.0 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 3.08 Sample of Architect’s Shop Drawing Stamp Shop Dwg File No. � � Shop Dwg Submittal No. APPROVED APPROVED AS NOTED If checked above, fabrication MAY be undertaken. Approval does not authorize changes to Contract Sum of Scope of Work unless stated in separate letter or Change Order. � � � REVISE & RESUBMIT NOT APPROVED Checking is only for general conformance with the design concept of the Project and general compliance with the information given in the Contract Documents. The Contractor is solely responsible for: dimensions which shall be confirmed and correlated at the job site; fabrication, processes and techniques of the construction; coordination of his work with that of other trades; and the satisfactory performance of his work. Contractor is responsible for all corrections noted hereupon. ARCHITECT Address City, State ZIP By 3.09 Date Sample Schedule For Submittals Project Submittal Type: C – Certificate S – Sample SD – Shop Drawing CD – Catalog Data PL – Spare Parts List MM – Maintenance Manual Contract No. Project Description Spec. Section Spec. Description Paragraph Number Submittal Type Date Action Taken Submittal Returned END OF SECTION 01330 - 4 Children of America Issue Date 08.10.10 Version 2.0 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES Assigned Number SECTION 01500 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES & PROJECT SIGN PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Provide temporary services and utilities, including utility costs: 1. Water (potable and non-potable). 2. Lighting and power & metering. 3. Telephone. 4. Toilet facilities. 5. Materials storage. 6. Dumpster and approved debris removal. B. Provide temporary site management items for the following areas : 1. Silt and sediment control and cleanup 2. Material Storage Enclosures 3. Daily mud, silt, and dirt cleanup of public streets, sidewalks, and offsite grounds 4. Work area cleanup and placement of debris in authorized dumpster, or carry-off site for legal disposal 5. Dewatering 6. Temporary roofing for weather protection of building interior. C. Provide for Project security and protection: 1. Fire extinguishers. 2. Site enclosure fence, barricades, warning signs, and lights. 3. Building enclosure and lock-up. 4. Environmental protection. 5. Pest control. 6. Snow and ice removal. D. Provide personnel support facilities: 1. Field office for Contractor’s and Architect’s use. 2. Sanitary facilities. 3. Drinking water. 4. Cleaning and trash removal. E. Project Identification Sign (PIS): The Contractor shall provide, install and maintain the (PIS) Children of America Coming Soon Sign shown on the Prototype A.02 (Detail 1). Locate sign where directed by the Architect or Children of America’s Representative, or as otherwise required for maximum exposure to vehicular traffic for each direction. 1. The Coming Soon sign is a 4x4x6 V shaped 3 post sign as shown on the Prototype on A.02 (Detail 1)and subject to approval by local ordinances and permits for temporary signage. 2. The (PIS) Children of America Coming Soon Sign shall be erected upon execution of the COA Lease Agreement and shall be maintained by the Developer/Landlord/Owner until the Certificate of Occupancy is issued. 3. No other signs are permitted on the project site. PART 2 - PRODUCTS - Not Applicable To This Section PART 3 - EXECUTION - Not Applicable To This Section END OF SECTION 01500 - 1 Children of America Issue Date 09.26.11 Version 1.01 TEMPORARY FACILITIES & PROJECT SIGN SECTION 01600 – PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Provide primary products from one manufacturer for each type or kind as applicable. When secondary materials or products are required, provide only those recommended by the primary product manufacturers. Do not “mix and match” without specific recommendations. B. Provide only those products selected and listed in these specifications. If an ‘or equal’ phrase is included in product specifications, it shall be understood that this means an ‘approved equal’ with such approval being obtained from the Architect and Children of America prior to the award of a contract. Such request for approval shall be in writing, and the Architect’s/Children of America’s response shall be in writing. No other form or method of approval of ‘or equal’ is acceptable. C. An ‘or equal’ phrase in these Specifications is not to be construed as permitting a substitution. A Substitution represents a deviation from these Specifications and will not be acceptable, except as specifically stated herein. D. On rare occasions, substitutions may become necessary. Products submitted for substitution shall be submitted to the Architect and Children of America with full documentation, and include costs of substitution including related labor, staging, general conditions, or other costs. Only four (4) conditions for a Product substitution will be considered. Any request for substitution must document one or more of these conditions. These are:: 1. Specified material or product is no longer in production or otherwise unavailable.. 2. Specified material or product cannot be coordinated in a timely manner with the other work. 3. Specified material or product is not acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 4. Substantial advantage to the Owner can be documented in terms of cost, time savings, or other valuable consideration. E. Products permitted by an ‘or equal’ phrase shall be submitted to the Architect and Children of America prior to award of contract. F. Products specified as being available by specific National Account Venders shall not be substituted. G. Architect’s approval of shop drawings, product data, submittals, or samples shall only be for specified Products, unless an ‘or equal’ phrase allows equals, and such products have been previously submitted and approved by the Architect before contract award. Shop drawings, submittals, product data or samples of products or materials that are considered as a substitution will be rejected and disposed of without review or comment. H. Substitution made without written consent of the Architect and Children of America shall be considered non-complying Work and subject to removal and replacement at the Contractor's expense, and, if warranted, disclosure to building authorities having jurisdiction. PART 2 - PRODUCTS - Not Applicable To This Section PART 3 - EXECUTION - Not Applicable To This Section END OF SECTION 01600 - 1 Children of America CITY, STATE Issue Date 08.10.10 Version 2.0 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS SECTION 01700 - PROJECT CLOSEOUT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 A. SUMMARY Provide the following as prerequisites to Substantial Completion: 1. Punch List 2. Supporting documentation 3. Warranties 4. Certifications and testing reports for alarm and sprinkler systems 5. HVAC testing and air-balance report 6. Occupancy permit, or release by municipality 7. Start-up and testing of building systems 8. Installation of permanent lock cores B. Provide the following prerequisites to Final Acceptance of building: 1. Complete all items on Punch List 2. Resolve all outstanding discrepancies C. Provide one (1) marked-up set of drawings including changes which occurred during construction, with updated and certified as-built site survey. D. Provide the following closeout procedures: 1. Submission of record documents listed above 2. Submission of operations and maintenance manuals 3. Training and turnover to Children of America's personnel 4. Removal of temporary facilities E. Final Cleaning: The following final cleaning shall be completed as a prerequisite to Final Acceptance of the building: 1. Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property, or that might damage finished surfaces. 2. Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit of Work to condition expected from a commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's published instructions. 3. Complete following cleaning operations before requesting an inspection for Substantial Completion. a. Clean Project Site, yard and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste materials, litter and foreign substances. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petro-chemical spills, stains and other foreign deposits. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved, to a smooth even-textured surface. b. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery and surplus material from Project Site. c. Remove snow and ice to provide safe access to building. d. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition, free of stains, films and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition. e. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs, plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics and similar spaces. 01700 - 1 Children of America CITY, STATE Issue Date 08.10.10 Version 2.0 PROJECT CLOSEOUT f. g. Broom clean concrete floors in unoccupied spaces. Provide final cleaning, waxing, and buffing of resilient tile, in accordance with Children of America’s requirements. h. Vacuum clean carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap. Shampoo if required for thorough cleaning. i. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. Remove glazing compounds and other substances that are noticeable vision-obscuring materials. Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces. j. Remove labels that are not permanent labels. k. Touch-up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes and surfaces. Replace finishes and surfaces that can not be satisfactorily repaired or restored, or that show evidence of repair or restoration. Do not paint over "UL" and similar labels, including mechanical and electrical name plates. l. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment, and other similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings and other foreign substances. m. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains resulting from water exposure and metal shavings. n. Replace air disposable filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters during construction. o. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes and reflectors to function with full efficiency. Replace burned out bulbs, and defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and metal halide fixtures. p. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy. 4. Remove temporary protection and facilities installed during construction to protect previously completed installations during remainder of construction. 5. Comply with governing regulations and safety standards for cleaning operations. Remove waste materials from Project Site and dispose of in accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction. a. Where extra materials of value remain after completion of construction, store these materials as directed by Children of America Project Manager. PART 2 - PRODUCTS - Not Applicable To This Section PART 3 - EXECUTION - Not Applicable To This Section END OF SECTION 01700 - 2 Children of America CITY, STATE Issue Date 08.10.10 Version 2.0 PROJECT CLOSEOUT SECTION 02110 - SITE CLEARING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 1.02 A. SUMMARY A. See Landscaping and Civil Engineering Contract Documents 1. In the case of any deviation between this Specification Section and the Civil Engineering Contract Documents the Civil Engineering Contract Documents shall prevail B. Clear and grub trees, stumps, vegetation, debris, rubbish, and designated materials from site. C. Protect trees, landscaping, site improvements, and other items not scheduled for clearing, or that might be damaged by construction activities. D. Strip topsoil and stockpile at approved location on-site. E. Provide temporary erosion and dust control. F. Do not disturb benchmarks or monuments. QUALITY ASSURANCE Comply with governing codes and regulations. PART 2 - PRODUCTS - Not Applicable To This Section. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 CLEARING A. Prevent damage to existing improvements indicated to remain, including improvements on and off site. Protect existing trees and vegetation indicated to remain. Do not stockpile materials and restrict traffic within drip line of trees. Provide and maintain temporary guards to encircle trees or groups of trees; obtain approval before beginning work. B. Repair or replace vegetation which has been damaged or pay damages. Remove heavy growths of grass before stripping. Stockpile satisfactory topsoil without stones, foreign matter and weeds in locations directed. C. Completely remove all stumps, trees, brush, fences, poles, stubs, rubbish, and debris except for those indicated to remain. Remove any material at least 30" below finish grade and to the extent necessary to not interfere with new construction. D. Prevent erosion and siltation of streets, catch basins and piping. Control windblown dust. Remove waste materials and unsatisfactory topsoil from site and dispose of in a legal manner. END OF SECTION 02110 - 1 Children of America CITY, STATE Issue Date 08.10.10 Version 2.0 SITE CLEARING SECTION 02200 – EARTHWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. See Landscaping and Civil Engineering Contract Documents 1. In the case of any deviation between this Specification Section and the Civil Engineering Contract Documents the Civil Engineering Contract Documents shall prevail B. Perform excavation, filling, compacting and grading operations both inside and outside building limits as required for below-grade improvements and to achieve contours and elevations indicated. Provide trenching and backfill for mechanical and electrical work and utilities. C. Provide subbase materials, drainage fill, and common fill materials for slabs, pavements, and improvements. D. Provide suitable fill from offsite if on-site quantities are insufficient or unacceptable, and legally dispose of excess fill offsite. 1.02 A. SUBMITTALS Submit for approval test reports, list of materials and gradations proposed for use. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with governing codes and regulations. Use experienced installers. Deliver, handle, and store materials in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. B. Comply with all recommendations of the geotechnical soil analysis and foundation recommendation, referenced in these Specifications as the 'SOIL REPORT". PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Subbase material: Gravel or crushed stone graded for intended use as subbase for paving materials specified, U.N.O. in the SOIL REPORT. B. Drainage fill: Washed gravel or crushed stone, 1/4" to 3/4" size; ASTM C33, Size 67, U.N.O. in the SOIL REPORT. C. Common fill: Mineral soil substantially free from organic and unsuitable materials, and free from rock or gravel larger than 2" in diameter; 80 percent passing No. 40 sieve and not more than 50 percent passing No. 200 sieve, U.N.O. in the SOIL REPORT. D. Structural fill: Gravel or sandy gravel free of organic and unsuitable materials and within the following gradation limits: 4" sieve, 100 percent finer by weight; 1" sieve, 60 to 100 percent; No. 4 sieve, 25 to 85 percent; No.20 sieve, 10 to 60 percent; No. 50 sieve, 4 to 35 percent; No. 200 sieve, 0 to 5 percent, U.N.O. in the SOIL REPORT. PART 3 - EXECUTION 02200 - 1 Children of America CITY, STATE Issue Date 08.10.10 Version 2.0 EARTHWORK 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Excavation is unclassified and includes excavation to subgrade regardless of materials encountered. Repair excavations beyond elevations and dimensions indicated as follows: 1. At structure: Concrete or compacted structural fill. 2. Elsewhere: Backfill and compact as directed. B. Do not perform work without written authorization from the Owner if subgrade material is unsuitable for intended use. C. Maintain stability of excavations; coordinate shoring and bracing as required by authorities having jurisdiction. Prevent surface and subsurface water from accumulating in excavations. Stockpile satisfactory materials for reuse, allow for proper drainage and do not stockpile materials within drip line of trees to remain. D. Compact materials at the optimum moisture content as determined by ASTM D1557 by aeration or wetting to the following percentages of maximum dry density: 1. Structure, Pavement, Walkways: Subgrade and each fill layer to 95% of maximum dry density to suitable depth, U.N.O. in the SOIL REPORT. 2. Unpaved Areas: Top 6" of subgrade and each fill layer to 90% maximum dry density, U.N.O. in the SOIL REPORT. E. Place acceptable materials in layers not more than 8" loose depth for materials compacted by heavy equipment and not more than 4" loose depth for materials compacted by hand equipment to subgrades indicated as follows: 1. Structural Fill: Use under foundations, slabs on grade in layers as indi cated, U.N.O. in the SOIL REPORT. 2. Drainage Fill: Use under designated building slabs, at foundation drainage and elsewhere as indicated, U.N.O. in the SOIL REPORT. 3. Common Fill: Use under unpaved areas, U.N.O. in the SOIL REPORT. 4. Subbase Material: Use under pavement, walks, steps, piping and conduit, U.N.O. in the SOIL REPORT. F. Grade to within 1/2" above or below required subgrade and within a tolerance of 1/2" in ten feet. G. Protect newly graded areas from traffic and erosion. Recompact and regrade settled, disturbed and damaged areas as necessary to restore quality, appearance, and condition of work. H. Control erosion and windblown dust. Dispose of waste and unsuitable materials off site in a legal manner. END OF SECTION 02200 - 2 Children of America CITY, STATE Issue Date 08.10.10 Version 2.0 EARTHWORK SECTION 02361 - TERMITE CONTROL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Soil treatment. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Treatments and application instructions, including EPA Registered Label. B. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of termite control products certifying that treatments furnished comply with requirements. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator Qualifications: A PCO who is licensed according to regulations of authorities having jurisdiction to apply termite control treatment in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced and has completed termite control treatment similar to that indicated for this Project and whose work has a record of successful in-service performance. 1.04 WARRANTY B. Warranty: Written warranty, signed by applicator and Contractor certifying that termite control work, consisting of applied soil termiticide treatment, will prevent infestation of subterranean termites. If subterranean termite activity or damage is discovered during warranty period, re-treat soil and repair or replace damage caused by termite infestation. 1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 SOIL TREATMENT A. Termiticide: Provide an EPA-registered termiticide complying with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction, in a soluble or emulsible, concentrated formulation that dilutes with water or foaming agent, and formulated to prevent termite infestation. Use only soil treatment solutions that are not harmful to plants. Provide quantity required for application at the label volume and rate for the maximum termiticide concentration allowed for each specific use, according to the product’s EPA-Registered Label. B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. AgrEvo Environmental Health, Inc.; a Company of Hoechst and Schering, Berlin. 2. American Cyanamid Co.; Agricultural Products Group; Specialty Products Department. 3. Bayer Corp.; Garden & Professional Care. 4. DowElanco. 5. FMC Corp.; Pest Control Specialties. 6. Zeneca Professional Products. PART 3 - EXECUTION 02361 - 1 Children of America CITY, STATE Issue Date 08.10.10 Version 2.0 TERMITE CONTROL 3.01 PREPARATION A. General: Comply with the most stringent requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and with manufacturer’s written instructions for preparing substrate. Remove all extraneous sources of wood cellulose and other edible materials such as wood debris, tree stumps and roots, stakes, formwork, and construction waste wood from soil and around foundations. B. Soil Treatment Preparation: Remove foreign matter and impermeable soil materials that could decrease treatment effectiveness on areas to be treated. Loosen, rake, and level soil to be treated, except previously compacted areas under slabs and footings. Termiticides may be applied before placing compacted fill under slabs if recommended by termiticide manufacturer. 3.02 APPLYING SOIL TREATMENT A. Application: Mix soil treatment termiticide solution to a uniform consistency. Provide quantity required for application at the label volume and rate for the maximum specified concentration of termiticide, according to manufacturer’s EPA-Registered Label, to the following so that a continuous horizontal and vertical termiticidal barrier or treated zone is established around and under building construction. Distribute the treatment evenly. 1. Slabs-on-Grade: Under ground-supported slab construction, including footings, building slabs, and attached slabs as an overall treatment. Treat soil materials before concrete footings and slabs are placed. 2. Foundations: Adjacent soil including soil along entire inside perimeter of foundation walls, along both sides of interior partition walls, around plumbing pipes and electric conduit penetrating slab, and around interior column footers, piers; and along entire outside perimeter, from grade to bottom of footing. penetrated. B. Avoid disturbance of treated soil after application. Keep off treated areas until completely dry. C. Protect termiticide solution, dispersed in treated soils and fills, from being diluted until ground-supported slabs are installed. Use waterproof barrier according to EPA-Registered Label instructions. D. Post warning signs in areas of application. E. Reapply soil treatment solution to areas disturbed by subsequent excavation, grading, landscaping, or other construction activities following application. END OF SECTION 02361 - 2 Children of America CITY, STATE Issue Date 08.10.10 Version 2.0 TERMITE CONTROL SECTION 02510 - ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. See Landscaping and Civil Engineering Contract Documents 1. In the case of any deviation between this Specification Section and the Civil Engineering Contract Documents the Civil Engineering Contract Documents shall prevail B. Provide asphalt concrete paving for following applications in accordance with local DOT standards or other standards of authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Parking areas. 2. Driveways. C. Provide striping and markings for parking, roadway, and handicapped markings. 1.02 A. 1.03 A. SUBMITTALS Submit for approval product data, test reports. QUALITY ASSURANCE Comply with governing codes and regulations. Provide products of acceptable manufacturers which have been in satisfactory use in similar service for three years. Use experienced installers. Deliver, handle, and store materials in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Prime coat: Per DOT standards B. Tack coat: Per DOT standards C. Asphalt pavement: Per DOT standards D. Aggregate: Per DOT standards E. Traffic paint: Quick-drying chlorinated-rubber alkyd type. 1. Parking striping and directional arrows: Yellow 2. Handicapped logo: Blue 3. Handicapped aisle diagonal striping: Blue 4. All other striping: White. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 A. INSTALLATION Asphalt/aggregate Mixture: Comply with local DOT Standard Specifications. Class as required by loading and use. 02510 - 1 Children of America CITY, STATE Issue Date 08.10.10 Version 2.0 ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVING B. Remove loose material from compacted subbase. Proof roll and check for areas requiring additional compaction. Report unsatisfactory conditions in writing. Beginning of work means acceptance of subbase. C. Apply prime coat to prepared subbase. Apply tack coat to previous laid work and adjacent in-place concrete surfaces. D. Place asphalt concrete at minimum temperature of 225 degrees F in strips not less than 10' wide overlapping previous strips. Complete entire base course before beginning surface course. E. Provide tack coat between curb and pavement. F. Asphalt thicknesses: Provide thickness of asphalt courses as shown on Civil Engineering Drawings G. Begin rolling when pavement can withstand weight of roller. Roll while still hot to obtain maximum density and to eliminate roller marks. H. Provide 4" lane and striping paint in uniform, straight lines. I. Provide wheel stops where indicated and securely dowel into pavement. J. Protect work from traffic and damage. Remove all site equipment prior to final asphalt topping and avoid storing any equipment, supplies, trailers, dumpsters, or other construction products on finished asphalt. K. Test in-place asphalt work for thickness and smoothness. Remove and replace defective work and patch to eliminate evidence of patching. L. Asphalt thickness shown on Drawings. END OF SECTION 02510 - 2 Children of America CITY, STATE Issue Date 08.10.10 Version 2.0 ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVING SECTION 02520 - PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. See Landscaping and Civil Engineering Contract Documents 1. In the case of any deviation between this Specification Section and the Civil Engineering Contract Documents the Civil Engineering Contract Documents shall prevail B. Provide Portland cement concrete paving at following locations and prepared subbase and compacted base. 1. Driveways. vehicular entrances, aprons, and curb cuts. 2. Pedestrian sidewalks 3. Ramps, steps, stoops, landings, and pads (including dumpster pads) 4. Standing and combination curbs. 1.02 A. QUALITY ASSURANCE Comply with governing codes and regulations. Provide products of acceptable manufacturers which have been in satisfactory use in similar service for three years. Use experienced installers. Deliver, handle, and store materials in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 A. MATERIALS Concrete mix design: Specific mixes as required for sidewalks, curbs, and vehicular ways. Submit mix proposed for use for approval. 1. Driveways, vehicular entrances, aprons 4000 psi @ 28 days 2. Pedestrian sidewalks 4000 psi @ 28 days 3. Ramps, steps, stoops, landings, and pads 4000 psi @ 28 days 4. Standing curbs and combination walk-curbs 4000 psi @ 28 days B. Air Entrainment: Provide approved air entraining admixture on all exterior concrete subject to freezing temperatures in conformance with ASTM C260. Air entrainment shall not exceed 6% ± 1% by volume. C. Reinforcing of all concrete paving: 6x6-W1.4xW1.4 welded flat wire mesh and ASTM A36 deformed galvanized steel bars. All exterior paving, including sidewalks, stoops, pads, and other flatwork shall be reinforced with flat wire mesh. Additional structural reinforcing will be shown on drawings where required. D. Expansion Joints. 1. Joint-Filler Strips: 1/2 inch thick x full slab depth; closed cell polyethylene expansion joint filler with 1/2” deep peel-off top strip. Nuflex Filler Strips Manufactured by TVM Building Products (Acton, Ontario) or equal. E. Finish: 1. Paving: Fine bristled stiff broom. Texture in direction of water drainage. 2. Curbs: Steel form finish. F. Drainage Fill: 6 inch minimum compacted granular fill beneath all concrete paving. 02520 - 1 Children of America CITY, STATE Issue Date 08.10.10 Version 2.0 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Proof roll subbase and check for unstable areas. Report unsatisfactory conditions in writing. Beginning paving work means acceptance of subbase. B. Slope subgrade away from building to provide for positive drainage. Coordinate subgrade connections to downspout drain tiles and perimeter drain beneath sidewalks. Do not proceed with sidewalk work until all downspout drainage components are in place and ready for final inspection. C. Maintain a continuous slope away from building of not more than 2% and not less than 1% D. Install a strippable closed-cell polyfoam expansion joint between building face and sidewalk. After curing strip joint and fill with pourable filler specified in Section 07900. E. Comply with concrete section for concrete mix, testing placement, joints, tolerances, curing, repairs and protection. F. Provide not less than 6 inches of granular fill beneath all paving. Compact fill to maximum density. G. Install PVC tile adaptors for receiving downspouts cast into sidewalks directly adjacent to building walls. Coordinate location, size, and depth with downspout/sheet metal installers. H. Provide expansion joints and control joints where shown on Drawings and as follows: 1. Transverse Joints In Sidewalks: a. Expansion joints: Locate joints at 20 feet oc & at intersections with other walks or curbs. Provide smooth dowels across transverse joints which permit horizontal movement but no vertical shear movement. At all expansion joints, strip 1/2” top of joint filler and install pourable joint filler full depth in joint b. Control Joints: Tool joints at 5 feet oc maximum. c. Coordinate location of tooled control joints and expansion joints to center a 5’x5’ sidewalk section on each exterior door threshold forming a door stoop. 2. Longitudinal Expansion Joints In Sidewalks: Strip 1/2” top of joint filler and install pourable joint filler full depth in joint between sidewalk and masonry face of building wall. Overfill joint and trim joint filler flush with top of joint after hardening. 3. Door Stoops: Provide isolation joints at each 5’ x 5’ door threshold sidewalk section. Where two doors permit a double section, locate the joints 10 feet apart with a center tooled joint. 4. Curbs: Expansion joints @ 20 feet oc & at beginning and ending of curves, radii, or intersection with other walks or curbs. Tool joints @ 5 feet oc to align with sidewalk joints. At expansion joints, strip 1/2” top of joint filler and install pourable joint filler full depth in joint END OF SECTION 02520 - 2 Children of America CITY, STATE Issue Date 08.10.10 Version 2.0 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING SECTION 02660 - WATER DISTRIBUTION PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. See Landscaping and Civil Engineering Contract Documents 1. In the case of any deviation between this Specification and the Civil Engineering Contract Documents the Civil Engineering Contract Documents shall prevail B. Provide an operating underground, exterior water service piping system. Include piping, control valves, vaults, and steel and concrete anchorages. 1.02 A. SUBMITTALS Submit for approval shop drawings, product data, test reports. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with governing codes and regulations. Provide products of acceptable manufacturers which have been in satisfactory use in similar service for three years. Use experienced installers. Deliver, handle, and store materials in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Pressure pipe (as permitted by local utility or UNO in Civil Engineering drawings: 1. Ductile iron pipe: AWWA C151 with cement mortar lining. 2. Steel pipe: AWWA C200, Schedule 40. 3 Polyvinyl chloride pipe: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40. B. Control valves: Gate, check and butterfly valves with 150 psi minimum working pressure unless greater working pressure required at site. C. Water meter: Local utility company standard. D. Building Entrance: Provide all building entrance components required by local water Utility, including (as required) backflow prevention valve, globe valve, reduced pressure check valve, floor drain, etc. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install materials and systems in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and approved submittals. Install materials and systems in proper relation with adjacent construction. Coordinate with work of other sections. B. Clean and sterilize system. Test for proper operation. Backfill and protect work from damage. END OF SECTION 02660 - 1 Children of America CITY, STATE Issue Date 08.10.10 Version 2.0 WATER DISTRIBUTION SECTION 02720 - STORM SEWERAGE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. See Landscaping and Civil Engineering Contract Documents 1. In the case of any deviation between this Specification Section and the Civil Engineering Contract Documents the Civil Engineering Contract Documents shall prevail B. Provide an operating underground, exterior storm sewer collection system. Include sewer conduits, manholes, catch basins, and all frames, covers and gratings. C. Provide a complete downspout collection system to intercept each downspout at the base of the wall, and each playground surface drain. Run all collected water subsurface to appropriate outlet. D. All work to be in accordance with environmental and public works regulations promulgated by the local authorities. 1.02 A. 1.03 A. SUBMITTALS Submit for approval shop drawings, product data, test reports. QUALITY ASSURANCE Comply with governing codes and regulations. Provide products of acceptable manufacturers which have been in satisfactory use in similar service for three years. Use experienced installers. Deliver, handle, and store materials in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Conduit material: 1. Concrete pipe, ASTM C 4443. 2. Polyvinyl chloride pipe, ASTM D3033, solvent fittings. B. HDPE pipe. 1. PRODUCTION AND MATERIAL STANDARDS FOR HDPE - Corrugate High Density Polyethylene Type S (HDPE) pipe shall be manufactured in accordance with AASHTO M 294. Pipe manufactured under this specification shall have a minimum Cell Class of d 324420C in accordance with ASTM D 3350. The flexibility factor of HDPE pipe shall not exceed 0.095. Ribbed Polyethylene pipe shall be in accordance with ASTM F894 for the specified sizes, meeting the requirements for RSC 100 or RSC 160. Pipe manufactured under this specification shall have a minimum Cell Class of 35434C in accordance with STM D3350. Smooth wall Polyethylene pipe shall be in accordance with ASTM F714 for the specified sizes. Pipe manufactured under this specification shall have a minimum Cell Class of 3543c in accordance with STM D 3350. 02720 - 1 Children of America CITY, STATE Issue Date 08.10.10 Version 2.0 STORM SEWERAGE All polyethylene pipe and fittings shall be made from high molecular weight high density polyethylene material meeting the applicable Cell Class requirements. All polyethylene material used in storm sewer pipe manufacture shall be virgin resin 2. HDPE JOINTS - High density Polyethylene pipe shall possess male and female pope ends which allow the construction of overlapping, gasketed pipe joints, in conformance with the requirements of ASTM D 3212. The gasket material shall conform to all requirements of ASTM F 477. As an alternative, pipe joints utilizing external coupling bands will be accepted, provided the minimum AASHTO requirements for satisfying soil tightness are also achieved Manufactured wyes tees, elbows or adapters will not be accepted for use in place of precast storm sewer manholes and box inlets. Precast storm sewer manholes and box inlets will be required within HDPE storm sewer system at changes in grade, alignment, size, and pipe material type. 3. High Density Polyethylene pipe (HDPE) possessing the following defects may be rejected for installation: variations from straight centerline; elliptical shape in pipe intended to be round; illegible markings as required herein; deep or excessive gouges or scratches on the pipe wall; fractures, punctures, or cracks passing through the pipe wall; damaged or cracked ends where such damage would prevent making a satisfactory joint. 4. HDPE Pipe Markings- For High Density Polyethylene pipe products, each length of pipe shall be clearly marked with the following information as a minimum: manufacturer’s name or identification symbol; nominal pipe size; production/extrusion code. B. Manholes and catch basins: Precast concrete, ASTM C 478. C. Manhole and catch basin frames, covers, gratings, and steps: Grey cast-iron with service type cast in covers and frames. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install materials and systems in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and approved submittals. Install materials and systems in proper relation with adjacent construction. Coordinate with work of other sections. B. Install a complete downspout drainage collection system. No surface storm water or downspout collection shall be run on the surface within the playground enclosure. C. Install a storm water collection system in the playground sub base, connected to site storm water collection system. D. Test for proper operation. Clean out system and protect work from damage. END OF SECTION 02720 - 2 Children of America CITY, STATE Issue Date 08.10.10 Version 2.0 STORM SEWERAGE SECTION 02730 - SANITARY SEWERAGE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. See Landscaping and Civil Engineering Contract Documents 1. In the case of any deviation between this Specification Section and the Civil Engineering Contract Documents the Civil Engineering Contract Documents shall prevail B. Provide an operating underground, exterior sanitary sewer collection system. Include sewer conduits, manholes, frames, covers and gratings. C. Modify the existing sanitary sewer system(s) shown on the Drawings. D. All work to be in conformance with local and state public works and environmental standards for design and construction of sanitary sewers. 1.02 A. 1.03 A. SUBMITTALS Submit for approval shop drawings, product data, test reports. QUALITY ASSURANCE Comply with governing codes and regulations. Provide products of acceptable manufacturers which have been in satisfactory use in similar service for three years. Use experienced installers. Deliver, handle, and store materials in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Conduit material: 1. Polyvinyl chloride pipe, ASTM D3034, solvent fittings. B. Manholes: Precast concrete, ASTM C 478. C. Manhole frames, covers, gratings, and steps: Grey cast-iron with service type cast in covers and gratings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install materials and systems in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and approved submittals. Install materials and systems in proper relation with adjacent construction. Coordinate with work of other sections. B. Install all cleanouts, vents, caps, and other pipe structures flush with surrounding construction to prevent tripping hazards, or other objectionable interference with pedestrian traffic. C. Test for proper operation. Clean out system and protect work from damage. END OF SECTION 02730 - 1 Children of America CITY, STATE Issue Date 08.10.10 Version 2.0 SANITARY SEWERAGE SECTION 02880 – PLAYGROUND EQUIPMENT AND STRUCTURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Prepare site for playground equipment in areas shown on civil engineering drawings. B. Playground equipment, structures, and equipment pads are supplied and installed by Little Tikes Commercial: Contacts: Jolean Boyer Corporate Accounts Inside Sales Rep 800-325-8828, ext 7390 [email protected] Proposal Preparation Order Processing Installation Coordination C. See Landscaping and Civil Engineering Contract Documents 1. In the case of any deviation between this Specification Section and the Civil Engineering Contract Documents the Civil Engineering Contract Documents shall prevail D. Equipment, installation, details, and photos of typical Children of America playgrounds are contained in Appendix ‘A’ of this specification manual. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with governing codes and regulations. Deliver, handle, and store materials in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Prepare site and compact subgrade to support installation of all playground equipment recessed and flush with finished turf elevation. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Prepare site and subgrade to permit installation of all playground equipment as follows: 1. Prepare compacted pad on suitable subgrade with no slope in any direction to exceed 2 percent (2%). Grade must slope away from building. 2. Elevation of playground subgrade surface to be between 6 and 7 inches below finished elevation of the turf. a. 4 ft fall height area = 4 inches below finished elevation of turf fall zone system b. 6 ft fall height area = 5 inches below finished elevation of turf fall zone system 02880 - 1 Children of America CITY, STATE Issue Date 08.10.10 Version 2.0 PLAYGROUND EQUIPMENT & STRUCTURES c. 3. 4. 5. 8-9 fall height area = 6 inches below finished elevation of turf fall zone system Coordinate dimensions of subgrade pad to match playground equipment ground pad. Coordinate location of playground equipment to assure it is not above or below any utilities Provide drainage swales, French drains, drainage mats, or storm water structures as shown on engineering drawings to provide for positive drainage on and around all playground equipment bases B. Include playground equipment installation by Little Tikes Commercial in the General Contractor’s Critical Path Schedule. C. Coordinate site storage to provide adequate area for 50 tons of crushed stone close to final playground locations for use by Children of America Playground Equipment Vendor D. Coordinate erection of fencing to permit free access of playground area by Little Tikes Commercial without dismantling fence. This access shall be a minimum of 6 feet wide. E. If damage to surrounding subgrade or other surrounding areas is caused by Little Tikes Commercial, such damage shall be immediately photographed, quantified, and an estimate of repairs prepared and delivered to Children of America’s Project Manager within 24 hours of Playground Vendor’s completion. Damages not reported as described or within the time limit shall be repaired at the expense of the General Contractor. F. Areas with standing water in or around playground equipment areas, in surrounding turf areas, or in any other sodded play areas shall be un-turfed, regraded, leveled, and/or otherwise repaired to the satisfaction of the Children of America’s Project Manager, and at the contractor’s expense. 3.02 PLAYGROUND INSTALLATION GUIDELINES A. Playground pad areas and detailed elevations at each corner are shown on the civil engineering plans. B. Playground dimensions shall be cut in at rough grade with box dug at 6” to 7” deep. Playground slopes in any direction shall not exceed a 2% C. Contractor shall coordinate final playground location to assure that no underground or overhead utilities are above or below play areas. Provide a drainage swale around playgrounds, and match each edge at the same height as finish grade D. Playground renderings and cut sheets from Little Tikes shall be presented to local governing body at approval phase of the project. Final decisions on color restrictions, height restrictions shall be coordinated with Children of America. E. Playgrounds are to be installed at rough grade after sidewalks are installed, Project Scheduling errors and omissions relating to Playground Equipment, resulting in additional travel charges or shipping charges by Little Tikes Commercial will be the responsibility of the Contractor. 02880 - 2 Children of America CITY, STATE Issue Date 08.10.10 Version 2.0 PLAYGROUND EQUIPMENT & STRUCTURES F. Contractor shall advise Children of America if: excessive amounts of rock are encountered during initial earthwork operations. If excessive rock is present, Children of America will make arrangements for alternative equipment installation such as surface mounting. G. Contractor shall prevent the use of unsuitable fill in and around playground areas, such as cinder blocks, bricks, wood, etc. H. Contractor shall stage an area on the site for the Children of America Playground Equipment Vendor to receive approximately 50 tons of crushed stone preferably close to the playground pads. Locate stockpile area to prevent damage to surrounding soil pads, landscaping, sod, sidewalks, etc. Provide an area for waste soil from playground excavations I. Fencing installation shall be scheduled after completion of playgrounds. If fencing is installed prior to playground equipment, the Contractor shall be responsible for the cost of removal and replacement of all fencing necessary for removal to accommodate playground installation. J. A 6 foot wide access to the playground site to be available until completion of playground and turf fall zone system installation. K. Little Tikes Commercial shall remove all trash from the site, unless Contractor permits use of site dumpster. L. Little Tikes Commercial shall inform a representative of Children of America on their daily activity, including arrival and departure from the site, delays in the work due to weather; and final completion of the work. END OF SECTION 02880 - 3 Children of America CITY, STATE Issue Date 08.10.10 Version 2.0 PLAYGROUND EQUIPMENT & STRUCTURES SECTION 02900 - LANDSCAPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. See Landscaping and Civil Engineering Contract Documents 1. In the case of any deviation between this Specification Section and the Civil Engineering Contract Documents the Civil Engineering Contract Documents shall prevail B. Provide plants and trees from list of acceptable materials. Do not use any plant material included on the published document "Harmful Plant List from the Children's Hospital of Pittsburg" See APPENDIX B. C. Provide related materials such as soil amendments and mulch. D. Provide related landscape accessories such as edgings, gravel, and plastic sheet. E. Provide pruning of existing plant materials. 1.02 A. 1.03 A. 1.04 A. SUBMITTALS Submit for approval product data, mock-ups, test reports, warranty, and maintenance data. QUALITY ASSURANCE Comply with governing codes and regulations. Use experienced installers. Deliver, handle, and store materials in accordance with manufacturer’s / Nursery instructions. WARRANTY Warrant trees and shrubs for a period of one year from date of Substantial Completion, against defects including death and unsatisfactory growth and except for defects resulting from neglect by Owner, abuse by others, or natural phenomena. Replace unsatisfactory plant material at end of warranty period. One replacement is required for defective material. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Plants and trees: Balled and burlapped and graded in accordance with American Standard for Nursery Stock, ANSI Z60.1. B. Topsoil: From site stockpile with additional fertile, friable topsoil from local source, meeting requirements of ASTM D5268, pH range of 5.5 to 7, free of stones 1 inch or larger. C. Lawns, seed: New crop seed mixture. D. Lawns, Sod: Vigorous, strongly rooted sod, 2 years old. 02900 - 1 Children of America CITY, STATE Issue Date 08.10.10 Version 2.0 LANDSCAPING E. Soil amendments and fertilizer: Nursery recommended corrections and additions to tested soil. F. Mulch: Well aged ground or shredded bark. G. Accessories: 1. Edgings: All heart redwood or staked steel. 2. Gravel: Washed, river-bed gravel. Not for use inside playground areas 3. Plastic sheet: 8 mil thick black polyethylene. Not for use inside playground areas. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install materials in accordance with approved submittals. Install landscape work in proper relation with adjacent construction and with uniform appearance. Coordinate with work of other sections. B. Prepare topsoil by mixing fertilizer with loam. Apply fertilizer at a rate of 2 lbs of actual nitrogen per 1000 sq. ft. for plant beds and 2 lbs per inch of trunk for tree pits. C. Install topsoil to a uniform depth of not less than 4-inches throughout site area before seeding or sodding. Install soil mix to a depth of 18" in plant beds D. For seeded lawns, apply seed at rate of 5 pounds per 1000 square feet. E. Lawn Schedule: 1. Seed: Install at all other locations not receiving sod, planting beds, or ground covers. F. Excavate as required for trees and shrubs. G. Install plant material and backfill with soil mix. Mulch, stake and guy trees. Water thoroughly. Allow for soil settlement. H. Replace damaged materials. 3.02 SODDING A. Lay sod within 24 hours of harvesting. Do not lay sod if dormant or if ground is frozen or muddy. B. Lay sod to form a solid mass with tightly fitted joints. Butt ends and sides of sod; do not stretch or overlap. Stagger sod strips or pads to offset joints in adjacent courses. Avoid damage to subgrade or sod during installation. Tamp and roll lightly to ensure contact with subgrade, eliminate air pockets, and form a smooth surface. Work sifted soil or fine sand into minor cracks between pieces of sod; remove excess to avoid smothering sod and adjacent grass. C. Lay sod across angle of slopes exceeding 1:3. 02900 - 2 Children of America CITY, STATE Issue Date 08.10.10 Version 2.0 LANDSCAPING D. Anchor sod on slopes exceeding 1:6 with wood pegs spaced as recommended by sod manufacturer but not less than 2 anchors per sod strip to prevent slippage. E. Saturate sod with fine water spray within two hours of planting. During first week, water daily or more frequently as necessary to maintain moist soil to a minimum depth of 1-1/2 inches below sod. 3.03 CLEANUP AND PROTECTION A. Promptly remove soil and debris created by lawn work from paved areas. Clean wheels of vehicles before leaving site to avoid tracking soil onto roads, walks, or other paved areas. B. Erect barricades and warning signs as required to protect newly planted areas from traffic. Maintain barricades throughout maintenance period and remove after lawn is established. C. Remove erosion-control measures after grass establishment period. END OF SECTION 02900 - 3 Children of America CITY, STATE Issue Date 08.10.10 Version 2.0 LANDSCAPING SECTION 03300 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE WORK PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 A. 1.02 SUMMARY Provide cast-in-place concrete for general building construction, including, without limitation: 1. Footings, foundations, piers, and pads 2. Floor slab on grade 3. Exterior concrete slabs, walks, stoops, pads, lamp post piers QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with governing codes and regulations. Provide products of acceptable manufacturers which have been in satisfactory use in similar service for three years. Use experienced installers. Deliver, handle, and store materials in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. B. Testing: Employ an independent testing agency acceptable to the [Architect] [Structural Engineer] [other] to design concrete mixes and to perform material evaluation tests. Provide 7, 14 and 28 day cylinder tests. Comply with ASTM C143, C173, C31 and C39. 1. Contractor shall make four (4), 6"x12" test cylinders for each 50 cubic yards of concrete poured for each days operation. Break 1 at 7 days, 2 at 28 days and retain spare. C. Comply with Structural Engineering notes on Drawings and the following specifications. In the event of contradictory information in these Specifications, the Structural Engineering notes on the Drawings shall prevail. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Formwork: APA rated B-B Plyform forms sufficient for structural and visual requirements or approved equal. B. Reinforcement: All reinforcing steel shall be detailed, supplied and placed in accordance with ACI 1. 315-99, ACI 318-99 and CRSI MSP-1-01on Drawings 2. All reinforcing steel shall be shop fabricated and, where applicable, shall be wired together and conform to ASTM A-615, Grade 60 3. All welded wire fabric shall conform to ASTM A185, Fy (min) of 65 ksi. All welded wire fabric laps shall be 8". C. Concrete materials: 1. All finished concrete, concrete formwork and falsework shall be in accordance with ACI 301-99. Contractor is solely responsible for the design and construction of all formwork, falsework and shoring drawings 2. Cement: Portland cement, ASTM C 150, Type 1. 3. Aggregate: Normal weight aggregates, ASTM C 33. D. Admixtures, all with less than 1% chloride ions: 03300 - 1 Children of America CITY, STATE Issue Date 08.10.10 Version 2.0 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 1. Comply with Structural Engineering notes on Drawings E. Miscellaneous Materials: 1. Vapor barrier under slab on grade: 6 mil polyethylene. 2. Liquid Sealer/Hardener: Compatible with vinyl floor tile adhesives. Non-metallic, quartz-silica, interior/exterior type; Euclid Surflex or approved equal. 3. Grout: Non-metallic, non-shrink type. F. Concrete Mixes: All concrete shall have the following 28 day compressive strengths 1. LOCATION STRENGTH AIR ENTRAIN. a. Wall Footings, Spread Footings: 3000 psi 6% b. All concrete below frost line, exterior slabs, piers, walls, columns, grade beams, concrete exposed to freeze/thaw: 4000 psi 6% c. Interior slabs on grade: 4000 psi Non AE 2. Max. Allowable Slump for consolidation by vibration or other: 4 inches 3. Max. Allowable Slump for flowable concrete: 8 inches (3 inch before admix) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.00 A. 3.01 GENERAL Comply with Structural Engineering notes on Drawings and the following specifications. If standards are contradictory, the Structural Engineering notes shall prevail. INSTALLATION A. Comply with ACI 301, 304, 311, 318, 347, CRSI “Manual of Standard Practice”, and ASTM C94. Do not change mix design without approval. Calcium chloride admixtures are not permitted. B. Comply with ACI 305 “Hot Weather Concreting”. Use a wet cure method when temperatures are above 90 degrees F. for initial curing days. C. Comply with ACI 306 “Cold Weather Concreting”. D. Chamfer edges of exposed concrete 3/4", unless noted otherwise.. E. Tolerance: Plus 1/8" in 10' for grade, alignment, and straightness. F. Construction Joints: Use keyways, continue reinforcement through joint. G. Expansion Joints: For sidewalks locate joints at 20 feet o.c., at all intersections, and as otherwise shown on Civil Engineering Drawings. Provide smooth dowels across joint which permit 1" horizontal movement and no vertical shear movement. H. Isolation Joints: Provide at perimeter of all slabs and slab intersection with other vertical elements such as columns and structural walls, changes in direction, and adjacent to a change in materials. Isolate all interior columns with diamond-shaped isolation joint section. Run control joints from points of diamond. I. Control Joints: Provide sawn joints; depth equal to 1/4 to 1/2 slab thickness. Locate where shown on Drawings. Fill level with latex floor filler. 03300 - 2 Children of America CITY, STATE Issue Date 08.10.10 Version 2.0 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE J. Vertical Finishes: As-cast and patched for concealed work; rubbed smooth, filled and cement paste coated for exposed work. K. Interior Slab Finishes: Trowel: Hard, smooth, uniform surface for areas to receive resilient flooring, carpet, or other thin finish material. L. Exterior Exposed Finishes: Broom: After trowel finishing, roughen surface by medium brooming perpendicular to traffic direction for exposed exterior walks, steps and ramps. M. Cure and protect work in accordance with ACI recommendations. N. Provide the following coverage over reinforcing: 1. Footings: a. Bottom and Unformed edges b. Formed edges and top 2. Slab on grade: a. Welded wire fabric b. Reinforcing Steel 3.02 3" 2" Upper Third 2" BLOCKOUTS FOR DOWNSPOUTS A. Coordinate locations of all downspouts and provide suitable foundations blockouts to accommodate the PVC downspout tile adaptor and the subgrade downspout leader. See drawings for details of tile adaptor and leader configuration. B. Provide adequate clearance to permit a flush installation of the PVC downspout tile adaptor with the finished face of the brick veneer, and set at an elevation flush with the finished sidewalk. C. Downspout tile adaptors that are not installed flush with the face of brick and set at an elevation flush with the finished sidewalk will be excavated and removed. Foundation will be chipped away to form a flush finish, and the sidewalk will be re-poured at the expense of the concrete contractor. 3.03 A. TESTING Provide concrete cylinder testing as noted in these specifications or as otherwise required by the structural engineer.. END OF SECTION 03300 - 3 Children of America CITY, STATE Issue Date 08.10.10 Version 2.0 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE SECTION 04200 - UNIT MASONRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 A. 1.02 SUMMARY Provide unit masonry for walls and partitions: 1. Concrete masonry units. 2. Face brick. 3. Mortar and grout. 4. Ties and anchors. 5. Embedded flashing. 6. Miscellaneous masonry accessories. 7. Masonry cleaners SUBMITTALS A. Submit for approval samples, product data, mock-ups, test reports. B. Only Modular brick size is permitted. Brick mason to prepare a mockup panel representing all brick layout and coursing, including a typical gauged flat header layout, rowlock, soldier course, and other critical brick coursing and detailing. Mockup panel may be a portion of the building work, provided it includes all of the brick features described. Approval of this mockup by the Architect is a prerequisite for continuation with brick work. 1.03 A. QUALITY ASSURANCE Comply with Structural Engineering notes on Drawings and the following specifications. In the event of contradictory information in these Specifications, the Structural Engineering notes on the Drawings shall prevail. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS A General: Provide shapes indicated and as follows: 1. Provide special shapes for lintels, corners, jambs, sash, control joints, headers, bonding, and other special conditions. 2. Provide square-edged units for outside corners, unless otherwise indicated as bullnose. B. Concrete Masonry Units: ASTM C 90 and as follows: 1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area compressive strength of 2800 psi 2. Weight Classification: Normal weight. 3. Design compressive strength of masonry shall be not less than f’m = 2000 psi 4. Provide Type I, moisture-controlled units. 5. Size (Width): Manufactured to the following dimensions: a. 4 inches (102 mm) nominal; 3-5/8 inches (92 mm) actual. b. 6 inches (152 mm) nominal; 5-5/8 inches (143 mm) actual. c. 8 inches (203 mm) nominal; 7-5/8 inches (194 mm) actual. d. 10 inches (254 mm) nominal; 9-5/8 inches (244 mm) actual. 04200 - 1 Children of America CITY, STATE Issue Date 08.10.10 Version 2.0 UNIT MASONRY 6. 2.02 e. 12 inches (305 mm) nominal; 11-5/8 inches (295 mm) actual. Exposed Faces: Manufacturer's standard color and texture, unless otherwise indicated. FACE BRICK VENEER A. General: Provide shapes indicated and as follows for each form of brick required: 1. Provide units without cores or frogs and with exposed surfaces finished for ends of sills and caps and for similar applications that would otherwise expose unfinished brick surfaces. B. Provide special shapes for applications requiring brick of size, form, color, and texture on exposed surfaces that cannot be produced by sawing. 1. Provide special shapes for applications where stretcher units cannot accommodate special conditions, including those at corners, movement joints, bond beams, sashes, and lintels. 2. Provide special shapes for applications where shapes produced by sawing would result in sawed surfaces being exposed to view. C. Face Brick Characteristics: as follows: 1. Suggested Manufacturers Acme “Blend 240 Crimson” Belden “Regimental Red” Boral Bowerston Glen Gery McAvoy Sioux City “Granite Red” 2. Color Range: Medium Red to Dark Red; Tight color range 3. Texture: Velour, wire-cut; Through-body Color 4. Nominal Size: Modular 5. Actual Size: Modular: 2-1/4” high x 7-5/8” long x 3-5/8” depth 6. Grade: Grade SW per ASTM C-216 7. Quality Control: ASTM Type FBS 8. Initial Rate of Absorption: Less than 20g per 30 sq. in. per ASTM C67 9. Efflorescence: Rated “not effloresced” per ASTM C67 10. Color: Full bodied color; surface coloring not permitted D. Mortar: ASTM C 270, portland cement-lime mortar, Type S for all mortar. Inorganic oxide mortar pigments. 1. Color: To be selected by Architect. E. Reinforcing: 1. Ties and reinforcing: Hot-dipped galvanized, ASTM A 153. 2. Horizontal reinforcing: Welded ladder type, 9 gage wire; deformed side rods 3. Reinforcing bars: Deformed bars, ASTM A 615, Grade 60. F. Veneer Anchors: 1. 12 gauge hot dipped galvanized 2-piece veneer anchors, Model DW-10 manufactured by Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. with 3/16ø inch Vees, Width and depth of tie to be sized in accordance with air space provided, but in no case shall the tie be embedded closer then 5/8 inch from the outside face of masonry. For a 1 inch air space, a typical tie dimension would be 4 inches wide by 4 inches long. 04200 - 2 Children of America CITY, STATE Issue Date 08.10.10 Version 2.0 UNIT MASONRY G. 2.03 Horizontal Joint Reinforcement: 1. Ladder type horizontal joint reinforcement meeting ASTM A615 Grade 60 (Fy= 60 ksi). Reinforcement side rods and cross rods shall be 9 gauge wire, galvanized, maximum width 4 inches (nominal). Model 220 Ladder-Mesh manufactured by Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS A. Visible Masonry Flashing: For flashing partly exposed to the exterior, use metal flashing specified herein: 1. Copper: 10-oz./sq. ft. (3-kg/sq. m) weight or 0.0135 inch (0.34 mm) thick; ASTM B 370; 16-oz./sq. ft. (5-kg/sq. m) weight or 0.0216 inch (0.55 mm) thick elsewhere. 2. Fabricate metal drip edges from sheet metal indicated above. Extend at least 3 inches (75 mm) into wall and 1/2 inch (13 mm) out from wall, with a hemmed outer edge bent down 30 degrees. 3. Fabricate metal flashing terminations from sheet metal indicated above. Extend at least 3 inches (75 mm) into wall and out to exterior face of wall. At exterior face of wall, bend metal back on itself for 3/4 inch (19 mm) and then down into joint 3/8 inch (10 mm) to form a stop for retaining sealant backer rod. B. Concealed Masonry Flashing: For flashing not exposed to the exterior, use one of the following, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings 1. Copper: 10-oz./sq. ft. (3-kg/sq. m) weight or 0.0135 inch (0.34 mm) thick; ASTM B 370 16-oz./sq. ft. (5-kg/sq. m) weight or 0.0216 inch (0.55 mm) thick elsewhere. 2. Copper-Laminated Flashing: Manufacturer's standard laminated flashing consisting of 5-oz./sq. ft. (1.5-kg/sq. m) sheet copper bonded with asphalt between 2 layers of glass-fiber cloth. Use only where flashing is fully concealed in masonry. 3. Asphalt-Coated Copper Flashing: Manufacturer's standard product consisting of 5-oz./sq. ft. (1.5-kg/sq. m) sheet copper coated with flexible asphalt. Use only where flashing is fully concealed in masonry. 4. Rubberized-Asphalt Flashing: Manufacturer's standard composite flashing product consisting of a pliable and highly adhesive rubberized-asphalt compound, bonded to a high-density, cross-laminated polyethylene film to produce an overall thickness of 0.040 inch (1.0 mm) 5. EPDM Flashing: Manufacturer's standard flashing product formed from a terpolymer of ethylene-propylene diene, complying with ASTM D 4637, 0.040 inch (1.0 mm) thick. C. Solder and Sealants for Sheet Metal Flashings: As specified in Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim." D. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Metal Flashing: a. Cheney Flashing (Sawtooth); Cheney Flashing Company, Inc. b. Keystone 3-Way Interlocking Thruwall Flashing; Keystone Flashing Co. 2. Copper-Laminated Flashing: a. Copper Fabric Flashing; Advanced Building Products, Inc. b. Copper Fabric; AFCO Products, Inc. c. York Copper Fabric Flashing; York Manufacturing, Inc. 3. Asphalt-Coated Copper Flashing: 04200 - 3 Children of America CITY, STATE Issue Date 08.10.10 Version 2.0 UNIT MASONRY 4. 5. E. 2.04 A. 2.10 A. B. a. Cop-R-Cote; Advanced Building Products, Inc. b. Cop-A-Cote; AFCO Products, Inc. c. Copperseal; York Manufacturing, Inc. Rubberized-Asphalt Flashing: a. Dur-O-Barrier; Dur-O-Wal, Inc. b. Perm-A-Barrier Wall Flashing; W. R. Grace & Co., Construction Products Division. c. Polyguard 300; Polyguard Products, Inc. EPDM Flashing: a. FlashGuard; Firestone Building Products. Alternative Flashing-Weep Products: At Contractor’s option and subject to Architect’s review and approval of submittals, a copper fabric flashing and drainage system may be used in lieu of separate masonry embedded flashing and weep vents. Acceptable systems that may be incorporated into the Work include the following:" 1. Copper Fabric Flashing/Drainage System: a. 5 oz. Flash-Vent System (Red label); York Manufacturing, Inc.. 2. Visible portions of flashing shall meet Paragraph 2.10 (A) above. WATER-RESISTIVE BARRIER A water-resistive barrier shall be applied to the exterior face of all building wall sheathing behind masonry veneer forming a continuous barrier between the masonry veneer air space and the wood wall sheathing: 1. Water-Resistive Barrier Material: Type II No. 30 asphalt impregnated organic roofing felt paper meeting ASTM D 226-97a, non-perforated. Fasten to all wall sheathing surfaces with plastic cap nails.. 2. Apply horizontally in shingle fashion, lapping all base flashings to form a continuous water shedding membrane directed to bottom course weep vents. MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES Compressible Expansion Joint Filler: Precompressed filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1; compressible up to 35 percent of width and thickness indicated; formulated from polyurethane. Compriband (AS) by Advanced Building Products, Inc. 800.252.2306 1. Size for uncompressed dimensions of 4x width and 2x depth of joint Bond-Breaker Strips: Asphalt impregnated, organic roofing felt complying with ASTM D 226, Type I; No. 15 asphalt felt C. Weep Vents: Polypropylene cellular vents or polyester mesh head joint cell vent system, Color to match surrounding mortar 3/8" x 2 1/2" x 3 3/8” 1. Mortar Maze; Advanced Building Products, Inc. 800.252.2306 2. Mortar Net Weep Vents; Mortar Net USA, Ltd. 800.664.6638 D. Cavity Drainage Material: Mortar deflection fabric consisting of a nylon polymer geomatrix mesh; 0,80 inches thick by 13 inches high, in 50-foot rolls .(Mortar Break) or polyethylene mesh 1 inch thick by 10 inches high, in 5 foot panel lengths. (Mortar Net) 1. Mortar Break; Advanced Building Products, Inc. 800.252.2306 2. Mortar Net; Mortar Net USA, Ltd. 800.664.6638 E. Foundation Drainage Board: subgrade foundation drainage board consisting of a basalt mineral fiber board; 1 inch thick cut to strips 6 inches high. 1. FX Drainage Media; Type 1; FibreX Insulations, Inc.. 800.265.7514 04200 - 4 Children of America CITY, STATE Issue Date 08.10.10 Version 2.0 UNIT MASONRY 2. 2.06 A. 2.07 Enkadrain Type P3; Colbond Geosynthetics 800.365.7391 MASONRY CLEANERS Proprietary Acidic Cleaner: (Vanitrol or equal) Manufacturer's standard-strength cleaner designed for removing mortar/grout stains, efflorescence, and other new construction stains from new masonry without discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces. Use product expressly approved for intended use by cleaner manufacturer and manufacturer of masonry units being cleaned. MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures, without specific writing approval of the architect and/or engineer. 1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout. B. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270 BIA M1, Proportion Specification. 1. Extended-Life Mortar for Unit Masonry: Mortar complying with ASTM C 1142 may be used instead of mortar specified above, at Contractor's option. 2. Limit cementitious materials in mortar to portland cement, mortar cement, and lime. 3. Use Type S for all mortar. C. Pigmented Mortar: Select and proportion pigments with other ingredients to produce color required. Limit pigments to the following percentages of cement content by weight: 1. For mineral-oxide pigments and portland cement-lime mortar, not more than 10 percent. D. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476. 1. Use course grout that will comply with Table 5 of ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for dimensions of grout spaces and pour height. 2. Provide grout with a slump of 8 ± 1 when measured according to ASTM C 143. 3. Grout minimum compressive strength shall be 3,000 psi. 4. Do not use mortar for grout. 5. Grout solid all masonry units below grade 6. Grout solid all masonry units containing reinforcing steel 7. Grout solid all masonry units supporting steel beams or lintels at least two (2) full courses below bearing elevation. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Comply with PCA “Recommended Practices for Laying Concrete Block” and BIA Tech Notes 11, 11A, 11B, 11C, 11D, and 11E, and NCMA TEK Bulletins. B. Weather Protection: Cold weather; heat mortar water and sand, enclose walls and provide temporary heat as recommended by BIA Tech Notes 1, 1A, 1B, and 1C. Hot weather; use mortar within 1-1/2" hours after mixing for ambient 80 degrees F or above. 04200 - 5 Children of America CITY, STATE Issue Date 08.10.10 Version 2.0 UNIT MASONRY C. Tolerances: From dimensions and locations in Documents for plumb, level and alignment, plus or minus 1/8 in 20'. D. Brick Veneer Anchors: anchor brick veneer to the wall framing with brick anchors spaced in horizontal increments at 16 inches (stud spacing) and spaced in vertical increments a maximum 18 inches oc (not more than 7 modular brick courses) so that not more than 2.0 square feet of masonry veneer area is supported per anchor. 1. Hohmann & Barnard DW-10 wire Vees shall be embedded at least 3-1/2 inches into the horizontal mortar joint. Wall clips shall be aligned with Vees, and screwed to the wall stud through the sheathing with fasteners size and type recommended by manufacturer. In no case shall the wire Vee be closer than 5/8 inch to the exterior finished face of masonry. E. Brick Veneer Joint Reinforcement: Install 9 gauge ladder-type horizontal joint reinforcement at 16 inches on center. Cut joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints. Lap all horizontal reinforcing a minimum of 12 inches. F. Bond: Lay exposed face brick in running bond except at areas of special coursing, patterns and bonding as indicated on Drawings. Avoid bricks cut less than 1/2 standard length. G. Joints: Maintain uniform 3/8 inch width; tool concave. Provide full bed, head and collar joints except at weep vents; keep cavity clean at cavity walls. H. Weep vents: Provide weep vents at 24 inches o.c. for brick veneer immediately above base course flashing, and for all other brick or block above all ledges, flashings and lintels. Keep weep cavity clean with baffle material or other approved method. I. Install steel lintels and provide reinforced masonry lintels where indicated. Where expansion joints follow masonry opening, provide a slip joint at end of lintel adjacent to expansion joint. J. Coordinate installation of flashings; prepare masonry surfaces smooth and bed flashings in mortar. Extend flashing at least 6 inches into masonry at ends of lintels. K. Provide expansion joints where shown on Drawings, not greater than 30 feet o.c. or at locations approved by the Architect. Expansion joint construction shall conform to published standards of the Brick Institute of America (BIA) and shall be properly reinforced and anchored to prevent differential settlement or lateral displacement between veneer faces. L. Prior to placement of brick and anchors, provide a weatherproof backing on all walls behind exterior face of wall sheathing, consisting of #30 asphalt felt, M. Remove and replace damaged units. Enlarge holes in mortar and re-point. Prepare joints to receive sealants. Clean brick using bucket and brush method; comply with BIA Tech Note 20. Clean Concrete masonry by dry brushing; comply with NCMA TEK No. 28. N. Install Sill Plate Anchors as described in structural notes on Drawings and in Section 06100. Layout all anchor bolt locations to avoid door sills, thresholds, and other interferences. 04200 - 6 Children of America CITY, STATE Issue Date 08.10.10 Version 2.0 UNIT MASONRY O. 3.02 Cleaning: Dry brush masonry surfaces after mortar has set, at end of each day’s work and after final points. Cut out and repoint defective joints. At final completion of masonry work, fill holes in joints and tool to match adjacent work. Leave work and surrounding surfaces clean and free of mortar spots and droppings. FLASHING, AND WEEP VENTS A. General: Install embedded flashing and weep vents in masonry at shelf angles, lintels, ledges, other obstructions to downward flow of water in wall, and where indicated. B. Prepare masonry surfaces so they are smooth and free from projections that could puncture flashing. Unless otherwise indicated, place through-wall flashing on sloping bed of mortar and cover with mortar. Before covering with mortar, seal penetrations in flashing with adhesive, sealant, or tape as recommended by flashing manufacturer. C. Install flashing as follows: 1. At masonry-veneer walls, extend flashing from exterior face of veneer, through veneer, up face of sheathing at least 8 inches (200 mm) above the horizontal leg, and behind air-infiltration barrier or building paper. 2. At lintels and shelf angles, extend flashing a minimum of 4 inches (100 mm) into masonry at each end. At heads and sills, extend flashing 4 inches (100 mm) at ends and turn flashing up not less than 2 inches (50 mm) to form a pan. 3. Extend sheet metal flashing 1/2 inch (13 mm) beyond face of masonry at exterior and turn flashing down to form a drip. 4. Install metal drip edges beneath flashing at exterior face of wall. Stop flashing 1/2 inch (13 mm) back from outside face of wall and adhere flashing to top of metal drip edge. 5. Install metal flashing termination beneath flashing at exterior face of wall. Stop flashing 1/2 inch (13 mm) back from outside face of wall and adhere flashing to top of metal flashing termination. 6. Cut flashing off flush with face of wall after masonry wall construction is completed. 7. At intersections with shingles either perpendicular or parallel to coursing. Provide manufactured reglets or rake mortar joint for embedment of upper edge of step flashing or continuous flashing at least 3/8 inch. D. Install weep vents in head joints of the first course of masonry immediately above embedded flashing as follows: 1. Install full head weep vents at perimeter base course directly above embedded base flashing. On side and rear elevations this vent occurs subgrade approximately 8 inches below top of sidewalk. On front elevation this vent occurs at finished grade elevation. 2. Space weep vents 24 inches (600 mm) o.c. 3. Install weep vents slightly recessed (1/8 to 1/4 inch) from outside face of brick. 4. In masonry cavities beginning at the base course, directly above the embedded flashing, install the cavity drainage filler to a height not less than 12 inches above top of flashing and continuous for the building perimeter. E. Install weep vents at the bottom of head joints in masonry immediately above embedded flashing and as follows: 1. Use wicking material to form weep vents above all flashing at brick headers, rowlocks, sills and other intersecting in-wall flashing. 2. Space weep vents formed from wicking material 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. 04200 - 7 Children of America CITY, STATE Issue Date 08.10.10 Version 2.0 UNIT MASONRY 3. 4. install cavity drainage filler to a height not less than 10 inches above top of flashing and for the width of the flashing. Trim wicking material used in weep vents flush with outside face of wall after mortar has set. F. Install reglets and nailers for flashing and other related construction where they are shown to be built into masonry, or where otherwise required for installation. 3.03 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING A. Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise damaged or that do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units; install in fresh mortar, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement. B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge voids and holes, except weep vents, and completely fill with mortar. Point up joints, including corners, openings, and adjacent construction, to provide a neat, uniform appearance. Prepare joints for sealant application. C. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints. D. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows: 1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes or chisels. 2. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for comparison purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before proceeding with cleaning of masonry. 3. Protect adjacent stone and non-masonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering them with liquid strippable masking agent, polyethylene film, or waterproof masking tape. 4. Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by rinsing the surfaces thoroughly with clear water. 5. Clean brick by one or a combination of the following methods: a. The bucket-and-brush hand-cleaning method described in BIA Technical Notes No. 20, using job-mixed detergent solution. b. Clean masonry with a proprietary acidic cleaner applied according to manufacturer's written instructions. c. Clean concrete masonry by cleaning method indicated in NCMA TEK 8-2 applicable to type of stain on exposed surfaces. 6. Protect all brick below water table with polyethylene film installed in top mortar joint of limestone water table. Remove after cleaning of upper brick. 3.04 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL A. Recycling: Unless otherwise indicated, excess masonry materials are Contractor's property. At completion of unit masonry work, remove from Project site. B. Excess Masonry Waste: Remove excess, clean masonry waste that cannot be used as fill, as described above, and other masonry waste, and legally dispose of off Owner's property. END OF SECTION 04200 - 8 Children of America CITY, STATE Issue Date 08.10.10 Version 2.0 UNIT MASONRY SECTION 05120 - STRUCTURAL STEEL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 A. 1.02 A. 1.03 A. SUMMARY Provide structural steel where shown on drawings. SUBMITTALS Submit for approval shop drawings, product data, test reports. QUALITY ASSURANCE Comply with governing codes and regulations. Use experienced installers. Deliver, handle, and store materials in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Steel shapes, plates and bars: ASTM A 36, or ASTM A 572, Grade 50. B. Steel pipe: ASTM A 53. C. Anchor bolts: ASTM A 307. D. High strength threaded fasteners: ASTM A 325. E. Non-metallic shrinkage resistant grout; Euclid Euco NS, L&M Crystex, Sonneborn Sonnegrout or approved equal. H. All Steel Lintels to be galvanized: Hot dip galvanized ASTM A 123. I. Welding: AWS D1.1. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Comply with AISC codes and specifications, and with AWS “Structural Welding Code”. B. Architecturally exposed steel: Fabricate with special care using materials carefully selected for best appearance. Store materials off ground and keep clean. Cut, fit and assemble work with surfaces smooth, square and with complete contact at joints. Set all cambers up. Weld all work continuously; grind smooth and flush to make seams invisible after priming. Prepare surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP6; apply prime coat within 24 hours after cleaning. C. Touch-up field welds and abraded areas with shop primer. END OF SECTION 051200 - 1 Children of America CITY, STATE Issue Date 08.10.10 Version 2.0 STRUCTURAL STEEL SECTION 05500 - METAL FABRICATIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A, This section includes the following metal fabrications: 1. Loose bearing and leveling plates. 2. Loose steel lintels. 3. Miscellaneous framing and supports 4. Framing and supports not specified in other sections. 5. Miscellaneous steel trim. 7. Pipe bollards. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Definitions in ASTM E 985 for railing-related terms apply to this section. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Shop drawings detailing fabrication and erection of each metal fabrication indicated. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. Provide templates for anchors and bolts specified for installation under other sections. 1.04 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Check actual locations of walls and other construction to which metal fabrications must fit, by accurate field measurements before fabrication; show recorded measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delay of Work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 FERROUS METALS A. Metal Surfaces, General: For metal fabrications exposed to view upon completion of the Work, provide materials selected for their surface flatness, smoothness, and freedom from surface blemishes. Do not use materials whose exposed surfaces exhibit pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, roughness, and, for steel sheet, variations in flatness exceeding those permitted by reference standards for stretcher-leveled sheet. B. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36. C. Steel Tubing: Product type (manufacturing method) and as follows: 1. Cold-Formed Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, grade as indicated below: a. Grade A, unless otherwise indicated or required for design loading. b. For exterior installations and where indicated, provide tubing with hotdip galvanized coating per ASTM A 53. D. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53; finish, type, and weight class as follows: 1. Black finish, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Type F, standard weight (schedule 40), unless otherwise indicated, or another weight, type, and grade required by structural loads. 05500 - 1 Children of America CITY, STATE Issue Date 08.10.10 Version 2.0 METAL FABRICATIONS E. Brackets, Flanges and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of the same type material and finish as supported rails, unless otherwise indicated. F. Concrete Inserts: Threaded or wedge type; galvanized ferrous castings, either malleable iron, ASTM A 47, or cast steel, ASTM A 27. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as required, hot-dip galvanized per ASTM A 153. G. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select in accordance with AWS specifications for the metal alloy to be welded. 2.02 FASTENERS A. General: Provide zinc-coated fasteners for exterior use or where built into exterior walls. Select fasteners for the type, grade, and class required. B. Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon head type, ASTM A 307, Grade A. C. Lag Bolts: Square head type, FS FF-B-561. D. Machine Screws: Cadmium plated steel, FS FF-S-92. E. Wood Screws: Flat head carbon steel, FS FF-S-111. F. Plain Washers: Round, carbon steel, FS FF-W-92. G. Drilled-In Expansion Anchors: Expansion anchors complying with FS FF-S-325, Group VIII (anchors, expansion, [non-drilling]), Type I (internally threaded tubular expansion anchor); and machine bolts complying with FS FF-B-575, Grade 5. H. Toggle Bolts: Tumble-wing type, FS FF-B-588, type, class, and style as required. I. 2.03 Lock Washers: Helical spring type carbon steel, FS FF-W-84. PAINT A. Shop Primer for Ferrous Metal: Manufacturer’s or fabricator’s standard, fast-curing, leadfree, universal modified alkyd primer selected for good resistance to normal atmospheric corrosion, for compatibility with finish paint systems indicated, and for capability to provide a sound foundation for field-applied topcoats despite prolonged exposure complying with performance requirements of FS TT-P-645. 2.04 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Form metal fabrications from materials of size, thickness, and shapes indicated but not less than that needed to comply with performance requirements indicated. Work to dimensions indicated or accepted on shop drawings, using proven details of fabrication and support. Use type of materials indicated or specified for various components of each metal fabrication. B. Allow for thermal movement resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient temperature in the design, fabrication, and installation of installed metal assemblies to prevent buckling, opening up of joints, and overstressing of welds and fasteners. 05500 - 2 Children of America CITY, STATE Issue Date 08.10.10 Version 2.0 METAL FABRICATIONS C. Shear and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs. D. Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch, unless otherwise indicated. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work. E. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed traffic surfaces. F. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with AWS recommendations and the following: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so that no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches those adjacent. G. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Fabricate and space anchoring devices to provide adequate support for intended use. H. Shop Assembly: Pre-assemble items in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for re-assembly and coordinated installation. I. Cut, reinforce, drill and tap miscellaneous metal work as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items. J. Fabricate joints that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water, or provide weep holes where water may accumulate. 2.05 ROUGH HARDWARE A. Fabricate items to sizes, shapes, and dimensions required. Furnish malleable-iron washers for heads and nuts which bear on wood structural connections; elsewhere, furnish steel washers. 2.06 LOOSE BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES A. Provide loose bearing and leveling plates for steel items bearing on masonry or concrete construction, made flat, free from warps or twists, and of required thickness and bearing area. Drill plates to receive anchor bolts and for grouting as required. Galvanize after fabrication. 2.07 LOOSE STEEL LINTELS A. Fabricate loose structural steel lintels from steel angles and shapes of size indicated for openings and recesses in masonry walls and partitions at locations indicated. B. All lintels exposed to exterior to be galvanized, primed, and painted. 2.08 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS 05500 - 3 Children of America CITY, STATE Issue Date 08.10.10 Version 2.0 METAL FABRICATIONS A. General: Provide steel framing and supports for applications indicated or which are not a part of structural steel framework, as required to complete work. B. Fabricate units to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and required to receive adjacent other construction retained by framing and supports. Fabricate from structural steel shapes, plates, and steel bars of welded construction using mitered joints for field connection. Cut, drill, and tap units to receive hardware, hangers, and similar items. 1. Equip units with integrally welded anchors for casting into concrete or building into masonry. Furnish inserts if units must be installed after concrete is placed. 2. Except as otherwise indicated, space anchors 24 inches o.c. and provide minimum anchor units in the form of steel straps 1-1/4 inches wide x 1/4 inches x 8 inches long. 2.09 MISCELLANEOUS STEEL TRIM A. Provide shapes and sizes indicated for profiles shown. Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units from structural steel shapes, plates, and steel bars, with continuously welded joints and smooth exposed edges. Use concealed field splices wherever possible. Provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages as required for coordination of assembly and installation with other work. 2.10 PIPE BOLLARDS (If shown on Site Plans) A. Fabricate pipe bollards from Schedule 80 steel pipe for pipe diameters 8 inches or less, and Schedule 40 for pipe diameters over 8 inches. Bollard size is indicated on Site Drawings. B. Fill pipe bollards with 4000 psi air entrained concrete, round and smooth top. 2.11 FINISHES, GENERAL A. Comply with NAAMM “Metal Finishes Manual” for recommendations relative to application and designations of finishes. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Coordinate and furnish anchorages, setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions for installation of anchorages, including concrete inserts, sleeves, anchor bolts, and miscellaneous items having integral anchors that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry construction. Coordinate delivery of such items to project site. B. Set sleeves in concrete with tops flush with finish surface elevations; protect sleeves from water and concrete entry. 3.02 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing miscellaneous metal fabrications to in-place construction; include threaded fasteners for concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through-bolts, lag bolts, wood screws, and other connectors as required. 05500 - 4 Children of America CITY, STATE Issue Date 08.10.10 Version 2.0 METAL FABRICATIONS B. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installation of miscellaneous metal fabrications. Set metal fabrication accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels. C. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints, but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade the surfaces of exterior units which have been hotdip galvanized after fabrication, and are intended for bolted or screwed field connections. D. Field Welding: Comply with AWS Code for procedures of manual shielded metal-arc welding, appearance and quality of welds made, methods used in correcting welding work, and the following: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so that no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches those adjacent. 3.03 SETTING LOOSE PLATES A. Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of any bond-reducing materials, and roughen to improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of bearing plates. B. Set loose leveling and bearing plates on wedges, or other adjustable devices. After the bearing members have been positioned and plumbed, tighten the anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims, but if protruding, cut off flush with the edge of the bearing plate before packing with grout. 1. Use metallic nonshrink grout in concealed locations where not exposed to moisture; use nonmetallic nonshrink grout in exposed locations, unless otherwise indicated. END OF SECTION 05500 - 5 Children of America CITY, STATE Issue Date 08.10.10 Version 2.0 METAL FABRICATIONS SECTION 06100 - ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 A. SUMMARY Provide rough carpentry work for: 1. Wood framing 2. Wood sheathing 3. Nailers, blocking, furring, and sleepers 4. Miscellaneous carpentry work 5. Exterior weather resistive barrier B. Carpentry subcontractor is also responsible for installation of: 1. Weatherproof membrane installed on all exterior wall sheathing surfaces. 2. Flashing support blocking 3. Replacement sill anchors (when required) – HILTI adhesive anchorage system 4. Miscellaneous blocking, furring, shimming, and other fit and finish requirements for doors, windows, cabinets, casework, and other components requiring carpentry blocking or backup. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with governing codes and regulations. Provide products of acceptable manufacturers which have been in satisfactory use in similar service for three years. Use experienced installers. Deliver, handle, and store materials in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. B. Grade Marking 1. Lumber: Dimension and board lumber shall conform to DOC PS 20 and shall be identified by the grademark of a recognized grading inspection agency authorized to grade the species. The associate or independent agency and the grading rules under which they grade, shall be certified by the Board of Review American Lumber Standards Committee. a. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. b. Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for moisture content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are minimum dressed sizes for dry lumber. c. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Plywood: Each sheet of plywood used structurally or as underlayment or roof sheathing, shall be stamped with the appropriate American Plywood Association (APA) grade designation for APA Rated Sheathing, APA Structural I & II Rated Sheathing, APA Rated Sturd-I-Floor, APA Rated Siding, APA Medium Density Overlay, APA High Density Overlay, APA Marine, APA Plyron, APA B-B Plyform Class I, or APA Decorative, and shall conform to U.S. Product Standard for Construction and Industrial Plywood, P.S 1-83/ANSI A199.1 DOC PS1 or DOC PS2 3. Pressure Treated Wood: ACQ or CBA Pressure treated wood shall be labeled in accordance with the American Wood Preservers Bureau Standard. 1.03 A. SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details. 06100 - 1 Children of America CITY, STATE Issue Date 08.10.10 Version 2.0 ROUGH CARPENTRY B. Fastener Patterns: Full-size templates for fasteners in exposed framing. C. Material Certificates: For dimension lumber specified to comply with minimum allowable unit stresses. Indicate species and grade selected for each use and design values approved by the ALSC Board of Review. D. Research/Evaluation Reports: For the following, showing compliance with building code in effect for Project: 1. Power-driven fasteners. 2. Powder-actuated fasteners. 3. Expansion anchors. 4. Metal framing anchors. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Engineered Wood Products 1. Beams, Girders & Headers over openings in loadbearing walls,: Laminated Veneer Lumber ( LVL ) with a minimum E = 2,000,000 psi; Fb = 2,900 psi. Sizes shown on Drawings. B. Dimension Lumber, finished 4 sides (S4S), Uniformly kiln dried to a 19% maximum moisture content: C. 1. Joists & Rafters: No. 2 or better, Southern Pine SPIB, Hem-fir (north) NLGA, Douglas Fir Larch WCLIB or WWPA. See Header Schedule on Drawings. 2. Headers (Non-Loadbearing Walls Only): No. 2 or better, Southern Pine SPIB, Hem-fir (north) NLGA, Douglas Fir Larch WCLIB or WWPA. See Header Schedule on Drawings. 3. Exterior Wall Use 2x4 & 2x6 Studs & Plates: No. 2 or better, Southern Pine SPIB, Hem-fir (north) NLGA, Douglas Fir Larch WCLIB or WWPA 4. Interior Wall Use Non-Loadbearing Partitions 2x4 & 2x6 Studs & Plates: No. 2 or better, Mixed Southern Pine SPIB, Hem-fir WCLIB or WWPA, Spruce-Pine-Fir NLGA, Western woods WCLIB or WWPA 5. Miscellaneous Nailers, Blocking, Furring, Etc.: Construction Grade or No. 2 or better, Mixed Southern Pine SPIB, Hem-fir WCLIB or WWPA, Spruce-Pine-Fir NLGA, Western woods WCLIB or WWPA Wood Sheathing, APA rated for use and exposure as follows: 1. Exterior Wall Sheathing: APA Structural I Performance Rated Sheathing, meeting the following minimum criteria: Thickness 5/8 inch Span Rating 24/16 Exposure 1 06100 - 2 Children of America CITY, STATE Issue Date 08.10.10 Version 2.0 ROUGH CARPENTRY Edges Size D. 2. Roof Sheathing for 6:12 sloped roof area: APA Rated Sheathing, meeting the following minimum criteria: Thickness 5/8 or 3/4 inch Span Rating 24/0 or 24/16 Exposure 1 Edges Square Size 48"x96" 3. Roof Sheathing for flat roof area receiving membrane roofing: APA Rated Sheathing, meeting the following minimum criteria: Thickness 3/4 inch Span Rating 24/0 or 24/16 Exposure 1 Edges Square Size 48"x96" 4. Mezzanine Floor Sheathing and Attic Walkboard Sheathing: APA Rated Sturd-IFloor, meeting the following minimum criteria: Thickness 3/4 inch Span Rating 24/0 or 24/16 Exposure 1 Edges Tongue & Groove Size 48"x96" Wood treatment: 1. E. Square 48"x96", 48"x108", or 48"x120" Sill Plates, Posts, Timber & Miscellaneous Exterior Lumber: Pressure-treated wood material with Preserve™ Ammonia Copper Quaternary (ACQ), or Natural Select™ Copper Boron Azole (CBA) waterborne preservatives meeting American Wood-Preservers' Association (AWPA) Standards: C1, C2, C22, C4, C5, C9, C15, C17, P5, ICBO ER 4981. a. For Above Ground Contact use CBA or ACQ with a chemical retention of 0.25 lbs/CuFt after treatment, and a uniform maximum moisture content of 19%. b. For Direct Ground Contact use CBA or ACQ with a chemical retention of 0.40 lbs/CuFt after treatment, and a uniform maximum moisture content of 19%. Fasteners: 1. Fasteners: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contract, pressure-preservative treated, or in an area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot-dipped zinc coating meeting ASTM A 153A/ A 153M and connectors meeting ASTM A 653 Class G185 or better. Aluminum shall not be used in any area that is in direct contact with pressure-treated wood. 2. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667. 3. Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272. 06100 - 3 Children of America CITY, STATE Issue Date 08.10.10 Version 2.0 ROUGH CARPENTRY F. 4. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1. E. Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1(ASME B18.2.3.8M). 5. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A(ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6); with ASTM A 563(ASTM A 563M) hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers. 6. Sill Anchors: a. Exterior Wall Sill Plates: Use 1/2 inch diameter steel anchor J-type bolt not less than 16 inches in length with not less than a 2 inch end hook. Use A1554-36 steel.. Space anchors as shown on Drawings, but in no case less than 48 inches on center. Embed anchors into concrete foundation wall or fully grouted masonry cores of foundation block leaving 2-1/2 inches of exposed threads above top of foundation for mounting and securing sill plates. Provide a 2 inch diameter washer and hex nut for each anchor bolt. Do not notch, counterbore, or otherwise alter the thickness of the sill plate at the anchor bolt fastening. b. Interior Loadbearing Wall Sill Plates: Use HILTI HAS 5/8” x 12” threaded rods @ 48” oc with HILTI HIT 150 adhesive. See drawings for details. Adhesive installation to be observed by Special Testing – Structural inspectors. c. Replacement Anchors: To replace originally installed sill anchor when it is misaligned, broken, or missing, or when otherwise required to meet sill anchor location and spacing after framing commences, retain the services of a Licensed Structural Engineer and an approved Testing Agency for the design, installation, and inspection of each replacement anchor. Submit a written report of such replacement activities to the Architect. All replacement sill anchor installation shall be the responsibility of the by Framing Subcontractor. 7. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry assemblies and equal to 4 times the load imposed when installed in concrete as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency. a. Material: Carbon-steel components, zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5. b. Material: Stainless steel with bolts and nuts complying with ASTM F 593 and ASTM F 594, Alloy Group 1 or 2(ASTM F 738M and ASTM F 836M, Grade A1 or A4). 8. Metal Connectors: Use metal connectors including joist hangers, tie downs, rafter ties, angles, straps, and other metal connectors where shown on the Drawings or required by these Specifications. Connectors shall be of the size, type, and structural capacity to support all loads supported. Use connectors manufactured by Simpson Strong-Tie, Kant-Sag, Silver Metal Products, or Semco. Miscellaneous Materials: 1. Weather-Resistive Barrier: Type II No. 30 asphalt impregnated organic roofing felt paper meeting ASTM D 226-97a, non-perforated. Fasten to all wall sheathing surfaces with plastic cap nails. 06100 - 4 Children of America CITY, STATE Issue Date 08.10.10 Version 2.0 ROUGH CARPENTRY 2. Window Setting Gaskets and Blocking: Adhesive asphalt-rubber strip for use as a nailing flange seal on jambs and head faces of rough opening. Install in shingle fashion and install the head strip behind the felt water-resistive barrier. Provide a continuous 1x4 blocking on exterior face, surrounding all window rough openings to furr window nailing flange approximately 3/4 inch outward. 3. Window Sill Flashing: Framing Subcontractor shall install window sill flashing using embedded flashing material identified in Section 07600 over a piece of bevel siding fastened to the bottom of the rough opening. 4. Wall Sill Plate Sealer Gaskets: Closed-cell polyethylene resilient insulation fabricated in ribbed strip for use as a sill sealer; 5-1/2" width for 2x6 wall plates. Install with ribbed side down. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL INSTALLATION A. Wood framing: Comply with IBC 2000 Chapter 23, and the recommendations of NFPA Manual for House Framing, and NFPA National Design Specifications for Wood Construction. 1. All nailing and fastening shall comply with the minimum requirements of Fastening Schedule IBC 2000 Table 2304.9.1 B. Plywood: Comply with recommendations of the current edition of the “APA Design/Construction Guide - Residential and Commercial”. Comply with special nailing notes on the Drawings and/or as specified herein. Special nailing is required at specific locations which is more stringent than APA’s requirements. C. Do not splice structural members between supports, unless otherwise indicated. D. Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics will not interfere with installation or with fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that interfere with function of member or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. E. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with the following: 1. NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners. 2. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code. F. Provide nailers, blocking and grounds where required, and as needed to provide solid backing for all wall & ceiling attachments ceiling attachments including, but not limited to, bath accessories, grab bars, wall-mounted fixtures, wall mounted cubbies, wall mounted kitchen cabinets, wall mounted handwash sinks, drinking fountains, window blinds and drapery attachments, door closers, ceiling-hung fixtures, shelving, wall mounted exit signs, lighting, and signaling fixtures, and all other similar item requiring solid mounting to walls or ceilings. Set blocking plumb, level and accurately cut. G. Install materials and systems in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and approved submittals. Install materials and systems in proper relation with adjacent construction. Coordinate with other work. 06100 - 5 Children of America CITY, STATE Issue Date 08.10.10 Version 2.0 ROUGH CARPENTRY H. Comply with manufacturer’s requirements for cutting, handling, fastening and working treated materials. I Provide fire blocking in concealed spaces of stud walls and partitions, including furred spaces, at the ceiling and floor levels and at not less than ten (10) foot intervals both vertical and horizontal Where fire blocking is not automatically provided by the framing system used, use closely-fitted wood blocking of nominal 2" thick lumber of the same width as framing members. J. Provide fire blocking at all eaves, soffits, and overhangs with approved material at a spacing of not more than 20 feet on center. Use approved fire blocking material cut to the inside shape and profile of the cornice trim to fully seal continuous sections of trim at not more than 20 feet on center. Fire blocking shall not be visible from the exterior. K. Restore damaged components. Protect work from damage. 3.03 A. FRAMING & SHEATHING Walls & Partitions: 1. All studs to be spaced at 16" o.c. Use 2"x4" studs for 3-1/2" walls, 2"x6" studs for 5-1/2" walls, and 2"x8" studs for 7-1/4" walls. Use 2”x6” studs at 16” oc for all interior and exterior loadbearing walls. All exterior walls, load bearing walls, and other walls so identified shall have double top plates. Top plates shall be lapped at all corners and intersecting partitions. Ends of top plate lower member shall occur over studs. Joints in upper member of double top plates shall occur a minimum of 48 inches from joint in lower member. Plates shall be nailed together as required in Fastening Schedule IBC 2000 Table 2304.9.1 Provide single bottom plate on all first floor walls. 2. Install pressure treated sill plates on all exterior walls. Drill plate to receive embedded 1/2 inch diameter J-anchor bolts. Fasten with 2 inch diameter washer and hex nut. Torque tight, but do not crush wood plate. Provide sill anchors on all exterior sill plates spaced at a distance shown on the drawings, but not greater than 48 inches on center, with not less than two anchors per sill plate section. Provide additional sill anchor bolts not more than 12 inches nor less than 4 inches from each end of each sill plate at splices and at corner intersections. Provide additional sill anchors and reduced spacing where shown on Drawings for special structural conditions. 3. Construct all corners and intersections with not less than 3 studs for solid corner blocking. Provide miscellaneous blocking and framing as shown and as required for support of facing materials, fixtures, specialty items and trim. 4. Provide continuous horizontal blocking row for partitions using 2" thick members of same width as wall or partitions. Locate continuous horizontal blocking row at all intermediate horizontal sheathing joints not to exceed 8 feet between blocking rows. 5. Frame openings with multiple studs and headers. Provide nailed header members, per Fastening Schedule IBC 2000 Table 2304.9.1 of thickness equal 06100 - 6 Children of America CITY, STATE Issue Date 08.10.10 Version 2.0 ROUGH CARPENTRY to width of studs. Set headers on edge and support on jamb or cripple studs. See Header Schedule on drawings for member size and end bearing. 6. For non-bearing partitions, provide dimension lumber or LVL headers sized as shown on the Schedule. 7. For load-bearing partitions, provide LVL headers sized as shown on the Drawings. Provide end bearing in accordance with the Drawings, Schedule, and Manufacturer’s data. B. Wall Sheathing: Wall sheathing shall be installed with long dimension horizontal and perpendicular to framing, staggered joints. Provide solid wood blocking at all intermediate panel joints if unable to span full height. Position each panel allowing 1/8 inch space at all edges to accommodate expansion and in accordance with APA Specifications. 1. Fastening Requirements: Fasteners for all wall sheathing shall be 10d cement coated common nails spaced at 4 inches on center along all supported panel edges, and 12 inches o.c. at intermediate members in the field of the panel. 2. Exterior face of all wall sheathing shall be protected with a continuous WaterResistive Barrier described above in Paragraph 2.01 (D) (3). C. Roof Sheathing: Roof sheathing shall be installed with the long edges of panels at right angles to trusses or rafters and be staggered to that end joints break over different trusses. Each piece shall span a minimum of two truss spaces with bearing on at least three trusses. Position each panel allowing 1/8" space at all ends and 1/8" at all edges to accommodate expansion and in accordance with APA Specifications. Place one (1) extruded aluminum “H” panel clip, or galvanized 18 ga. sheathing clip, between each truss for edge support. 1. Fasteners for all roof sheathing shall be 10d cement coated common nails spaced at 6 inches on center along all supported panel edges, and 12 inches o.c. at intermediate members in the field of the panel. Provide a double-row of 10d nails with pairs spaced 6 inches on center along all shear wall locations. 2. Exterior face of all 6:12 sloped roof sheathing beneath shingles shall be covered with Type II No. 30 asphalt impregnated organic roofing felt paper meeting ASTM D 226-97a, non-perforated. 3. Do not apply organic roofing felt paper to roof sheathing receiving membrane roofing. Install temporary waterproofing as described above in 2.01 (D) (10). D. Solid Blocking: All walls receiving drywall shall be built with solid edge blocking for full height. These walls and their points of intersection with other walls and ceilings must have full solid wood blocking to support gypsum drywall over its entire length and distance. Drywall clips, extended drywall ends, or partial corner blocking are not acceptable for intersecting drywall panels. 1. Provide additional solid blocking as described above in 3.01 ( C ). 2. Coordinate location of block for interior furnishings provided by others such as cubbies, furnishings, and other items E. Concentrated Loads : Provide solid wood blocking to support and transfer to the foundation, all concentrated load conditions (point loads) resulting from floor, roof girders or beams, including, but not limited to concentrated loads from hip girders, girders supporting chimneys, valley girders, doubled truss end bearing, and other areas where standard wall stud spacing is insufficient for transferring loads to foundation. Build-up studs to provide continuous load path from source of load to foundation. 06100 - 7 Children of America CITY, STATE Issue Date 08.10.10 Version 2.0 ROUGH CARPENTRY 1. 2. 3. F. 3.04 LVL Headers indicated are for load-bearing wall regions supporting common trusses at 2'-0" oc maximum. The contractor is responsible for coordinating truss shop drawing girder locations to either avoid bearing on headers or sizing special headers for conditions with girders bearing above them. At all girder locations on LVL headers provide three trimmer studs directly supporting each end of headers supporting girder loads and two continuous king studs on each side. When laying out roof trusses avoid girder members located directly over window or door openings. If unavoidable, provide transfer header at top of wall to span opening and transfer loads directly to foundation without bearing on window header. Do not notch, bore, or otherwise cut any special built-up stud, column, or any rafters. ACQ PRESSURE TREATED LUMBER A. Fasteners: Use only hot-dipped galvanized or stainless steel fasteners B. Do not permit electroplated or aluminum material to come into contact with any pressure treated lumber. C. If using Western wood species, treat all cuts, bores, or holes in accordance with AWPA Standard M4 using a coating of copper naphthenate preservative solution containing a minimum of 1% metallic copper. D. Dispose of ACQ treated lumber by burial in ordinary landfills. Do not burn ACQ lumber. 3.05 A. 3.06 FASTENERS Unless otherwise stated or shown on the Drawings, all fasteners shall conform in size type, and spacing to the Fastening Schedule: Table 2304.9.1. International Building Code –2009 or current edition. NOTCHING A. Cutting and Notching: In exterior walls and bearing partitions, any wood stud may be cut or notched to a depth not exceeded 25 percent of its width, except for built-up studs supporting special loads as identified on the Drawings.. Cutting or notching of studs is permitted in nonbearing partitions supporting no loads other than the weight of the finished partition. B. Bored Holes: A hole not greater in diameter than 40 percent of the stud width may be bored in any wood stud, except for built-up studs supporting special loads as identified on the Drawings. Studs may be bored a maximum of 2 inches for vent and drain lines. Bored holes not greater than 60 percent of the width of the stud are permitted in nonbearing partitions or in any wall where each bored stud is doubled, provided not more than two such successive doubled studs are so bored. C. In no case shall the edge of the bored hole be nearer than 5/8" to the edge of the stud. Bored holes shall not be located at the same section of stud as a cut or notch. END OF SECTION 06100 - 8 Children of America CITY, STATE Issue Date 08.10.10 Version 2.0 ROUGH CARPENTRY SECTION 06192 - PREFABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY: A. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1.02 A. 1.03 Types of prefabricated wood trusses include: Gable-shaped trusses. Girder trusses . Monopitch trusses. Gable end trusses DEFINITIONS: Prefabricated wood trusses include planar structural units consisting of metal plate connected members which are fabricated from dimension lumber and which have been cut and assembled prior to delivery to the project site. SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: Submit fabricator’s technical data covering lumber, metal plates, hardware, fabrication process, treatment, temporary and permanent bracing, storage, handling and erection. B Submit certificate, signed and sealed by a registered Professional Engineer, indicating that trusses to be supplied for project comply with indicated requirements. C. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings showing species, sizes and stress grades of lumber to be used; pitch, span, camber configuration and spacing for each type of truss required; type, size, material, finish, design values, location of metal connector plates; and bearing and anchorage details. Also provide detailed instructions for erection of trusses including storage, handling, lifting, stacking, temporary and permanent bracing, erection sequence, and other related instructions. D. Provide shop drawings which have been signed and stamped by a structural engineer licensed to practice in the jurisdiction where trusses will be installed. Such shop drawings shall include all design criterion, and a key plan showing roof framing layout by truss types. Architect’s receipt, review, and return of these shop drawings is a prerequisite to truss fabrication. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. TPI Standards: Comply with applicable requirements and recommendations of the following Truss Plate Institute (TPI) publications: 1. “Design Specification for Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses”. 2. “Design Specification for Metal Plate Connected Parallel Chord Wood Trusses”. 3. “Commentary and Recommendations for Handling and Erecting Wood Trusses”. 4. “Commentary and Recommendations for Bracing Wood Trusses”. 5. “Quality Standard for Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses”. B. Design by Manufacturer: Trusses shall be designed to meet the Connector plate manufacturer’s requirements to support all superimposed dead and live loads indicated, with design approved and certified by a structural engineer licensed to practice in the jurisdiction where trusses will be installed. 06192 - 1 Children of America CITY, STATE Issue Date 08.10.10 Version 2.0 PREFABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES C. Connector Plate Manufacturer’s Qualifications: Provide truss connector plates manufactured by a firm which is a member of TPI and which complies with TPI quality control procedures for manufacture of connector plates published in TPI “Quality Standard for Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses”. D. Single Source Responsibility for Connector Plates: Provide metal connector plates from a single manufacturer. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, HANDLING: A. Handle and store trusses with care, and in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and TPI recommendations to avoid damage from bending, overturning or other cause for which truss is not designed to resist or endure. B. Time delivery and erection of trusses to avoid extended on-site storage and to avoid delaying work of other trades whose work must follow erection of trusses. C. Repairs: If damage occurs or is observed in any truss member, all such damage shall be investigated by a licensed structural engineer. Repairs shall be made in accordance with the structural engineer’s recommendations, or shall be replaced. The cost of such repairs, replacement, engineering, and related expenses shall be paid for by the Contractor. All such repairs must be fully documented in writing, and signed and stamped by the structural engineer. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PERFORMANCE: A. Design: All manufactured trusses shall be designed to support the loads imposed and listed on the Drawings. In addition, special trusses shall be provided where indicated or otherwise required to support additional live loads on bottom chord. B. Manufactured truss minimum design loading shall be as follows: 1. Top Chord Live Load (Attic Truss): [30 psf.] 2. Bottom Chord Live Load (Attic Truss): [10 psf.] 3. Top Chord Live Load (Mechanical Mezzanine Floor Truss): [40 psf.] 3. Bottom Chord Live Load (Mechanical Mezzanine Floor Truss): [20 psf.] 4. A live, movable [300 pound] load applied at any point on any attic truss bottom chord. 5. Erection stresses. 6. Accumulated weight of all dead loads for the materials indicated in the drawings and specifications, including mechanical equipment, and mechanical mezzanine areas. 7. Accumulated weight of all dead and live loads of fully filled automatic wet-pipe sprinkler systems. 8. Trusses shall be designed for a maximum allowable deflection of [L/360.] 9. In-place truss assembly shall be adequately shored and braced to resist lateral live and wind loading based on Chapter 16 IBC 2000. C. Gable End Trusses: Trusses at gable and dormer ends of buildings shall be not less than 3-1/2 inches in thickness, and consist of plumb studs spaced at 16 inches on center. Such trusses may be a combination of sloped wall panels and/or structural trusses, or multiple structural truss assemblies with let-in vertical studs. Such trusses 06192 - 2 Children of America CITY, STATE Issue Date 08.10.10 Version 2.0 PREFABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES shall be part of the engineered structural roofing system and included in the truss submittals with engineer's certification. D. Special Bearing Heel: Provide a special bearing heel (energy heel) at all trusses when shown on schematic truss drawings to support fascia and cove molding system E. Special Truss Tail Assembly: Provide a special tail assembly at all trusses to support manufactured cornice-gutter system and wood blocking. Truss tail assembly ‘E’ is shown on schematic truss drawings and must be included in the truss submittals. 1. A diagonal truss tail assembly ‘E’ is required at each building corner. 2. The gutter, downspout & cornice system described in Section 07600 has zero tolerance for dimensional errors, out-of-plumb or out-of-square framing of rafter tails, corners, and running eave blocking. The Contractor shall be responsible for accuracy, plumb, square, and perfectly aligned framing. Any remedial adjustments needed to accommodate the cornice-gutter system shall be made by the framing contractor at no additional expense to the Owner. 2.02 MANUFACTURERS: A. 2.03 Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering metal connector plates which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Alpine Engineered Products, Inc. 2. Gang Nail Systems, Inc. 3. Hydro-Air Engineering, Inc. LUMBER: A. 2.04 Graded in accordance with truss manufacturer’s specifications. METAL CONNECTOR PLATES, FASTENERS AND ANCHORAGES: A. Connector Plates: Fabricator connector plates from metal complying with one or both of the following requirements: 1. Hot-Dip Galvanized Steel Sheet: Structural (physical) quality steel sheet complying with ASTM A 446, Grade A; zinc coated by hot-dip process to comply with ASTM A 525, Designation G60; minimum coated metal thickness indicated but not less than 0.036". 2. Electrolytic Zinc-Coated Steel Sheet: Structural (physical) quality steel sheet complying with ASTM A 591, Coating Class C, and, for structural properties, with ASTM A 446, Grade A; zinc-coated by electro-deposition; with minimum coated metal thickness indicated but not less than 0.047". B. Fasteners and Anchorages: Provide size, type, material and finish indicated for nails, screws, bolts, nuts, washers and anchoring devices. 1. 2.05 All trusses shall be anchored to the top plates of walls with a manufactured metal connector designed for vertical and lateral resistance of live loading, and fastened in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. The following are acceptable connectors for such application: [a. Simpson Strong-Tie Hurricane Anchor No. H-1 for double top plates] [b. Simpson Strong-Tie Hurricane Anchor No. H-3 for single top plates] FABRICATION: 06192 - 3 Children of America CITY, STATE Issue Date 08.10.10 Version 2.0 PREFABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES A. Cut truss members to accurate lengths, angles and sizes to produce close fitting joints with wood-to-wood bearing in assembled units. B. Fabricate metal connector plates to size, configuration, thickness and anchorage details required for types of joint designs indicated. C. Assemble truss members in design configuration indicated using jigs or other means to ensure uniformity and accuracy of assembly with close fitting joints. Position members to produce design camber indicated. D. Connect truss members by means of metal connector plates accurately located and securely fastened to each side of wood members by means indicated or approved. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION: A. General: Erect and brace trusses to comply with recommendations of manufacturer and the Truss Plate Institute. B. Erect trusses with plane of truss webs vertical (plumb) and parallel to each other, located accurately at design spacing indicated. C. Hoist units in place by means of lifting equipment suited to sizes and types of trusses required, applied at designated lift points as recommended by fabricator. Exercise care not to damage truss members or joints by out-of-plane bending, impact loading, or other causes. D. Provide temporary bracing as required to maintain trusses plumb, parallel and in location indicated, until permanent bracing is installed. E. Anchor trusses securely at all bearing points to comply with methods and details indicated, and as described in this Section of these Specifications. F. Install permanent bracing and related components to enable trusses to maintain design spacing, withstand live and dead loads including lateral loads, and to comply with other indicated requirements. G. Reject all trusses with imperfections, excessive camber, damaged connector plates, damaged or defective wood members, or other imperfection that would affect structural or aesthetic performance. H. Do not cut or remove truss members. I. Coordinate the placement and spacing of trusses to avoid conflicts with vents, ducts, flues, area separation walls, attic separation walls, gable ends, and other fixed elements. END OF SECTION 06192 - 4 Children of America CITY, STATE Issue Date 08.10.10 Version 2.0 PREFABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES SECTION 06200 - FINISH CARPENTRY AND MILLWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Provide finish carpentry for interior items exposed to view: 1. Running and standing trim and moldings. 2. Door and window casings. 3. Hardwood balustrade railings. 4. Shelving. 5. Decorative elements. B. Provide manufactured wood casework with shop finish: 1. Cubbies are provided and installed by Others (NIC) 2. Base and wall cabinets shown on Drawings. C. Provide custom plastic fabrications: 1. Plastic laminate countertops. 2. Plastic laminate vanity tops 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit for approval samples, shop drawings, product data, mock-ups of typical trim and moldings. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with governing codes and regulations. Provide products of acceptable manufacturers which have been in satisfactory use in similar service for three years. Use experienced installers. Deliver, handle, and store materials in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Quality standard for fabrication and products: Architectural Woodwork Institute Quality Standards, Premium grade unless noted otherwise. B. 1. 2. C. Interior finish carpentry and millwork: Running trim and boards for opaque finish: Softwood suitable for exposure and use. Cubbies and Mail center units are provided and installed by Others (NIC). Service and Closet Shelving: Shelving material: Countertop-grade, high-density 3/4 inch thick particleboard with white Melamine laminate material on all surfaces, 3. Fully Adjustable Shelving System. Knape, Stanley, or Vogt 1. D. 1. E. Millwork finishes: Wood for opaque finish: AWI custom grade, AWI finish system No. 11, premium grade opaque catalyzed polyurethane. Plastic Laminate Countertops: 06200 - 1 Children of America CITY, STATE Issue Date 08.10.10 Version 2.0 FINISH CARPENTRY & MILLWORK 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. F. Plastic laminate: NEMA LD-3, 0.050" thick horizontal grade. At counters, adhere to 3/4" industrial grade particleboard substrate. Plastic laminate finish to be AWI premium grade. Color and pattern Scheme is detailed in the APPENDIX All corners and edges of countertops to be rounded. Coordinate use of post-formed or built-up laminate work to accommodate this requirement. Theme laminate at entry countertop cannot be post formed. Fabricate as required for square edges. Millwork hardware: Stainless steel or Steel with chromium plate finish; ball-bearing sidemount drawer slides; self-closing inside-mounted hinges. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Provide work to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated. Install work to comply with quality standards referenced. Back prime work and install plumb, level and straight with tight joints; scribe work to fit. Caulk around all intersecting surfaces B. Install materials and systems in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and approved submittals. Install materials and systems in proper relation with adjacent construction. Use non-corrosive fasteners for exterior work. Coordinate with work of other sections. C. Provide eased horizontal edges, and radius corners on all countertops, shelving, trim, stools, and other casework or millwork exposed to pedestrian traffic. D. Comply with manufacturer’s requirements for cutting, handling, fastening and working treated materials. E. Repair minor damage, clean and protect. END OF SECTION 06200 - 2 Children of America CITY, STATE Issue Date 08.10.10 Version 2.0 FINISH CARPENTRY & MILLWORK SECTION 07200 - INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Provide building insulation board, blanket, and loose-fill types as applicable, including the following types and accessories: 1. Exterior and Interior walls: fiberglass batt. 2. Foundation and Slab perimeter, rigid extruded polystyrene board 3. Slab subgrade area: Polyethylene vapor barrier 4. Exterior walls – Interior Surface: Polyethylene vapor barrier 5. Exterior walls – Exterior Substrate: weatherproof backing behind all finishes 6. Perimeter sill: continuous sealer gasket 7. Flat roof: rigid polyisocyanuate insulation (See Section 07530) 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with governing codes and regulations. Provide products of acceptable manufacturers which have been in satisfactory use in similar service for three years. Use experienced installers. Deliver, handle, and store materials in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 A. MATERIALS Wall Insulation: fiberglass friction-fit or kraft-backed, batt-type insulation. 1. Exterior wall insulation: 6" thick batts, minimum R-value 19. 2. Interior wall insulation: 3-1/2" thick batts, minimum R-value 11 or equivalent sound attenuation insulation. 3. All insulation shall be concealed in wall cavities or attics. If kraft-backed insulation is used, a polyethylene vapor barrier will still be required. B. Board type insulation: Extruded polystyrene board at perimeter of slab and face of foundation wall; 2 inches thick; compressive strength 60 psi; aged R-Value of at least R-10; Styrofoam by Dow Chemical or Foamular by UC Industries. C. Vapor Barrier For Exterior Walls: 4 mil polyethylene vapor barrier, transparent. Conform with ASTM E 154. Kraft and foil backed batt insulation is not an acceptable substitution for a polyethylene film vapor barrier. D. Vapor Barrier For Concrete Slab: 6 mil polyethylene vapor barrier, transparent. Conform with ASTM E 154. E. Sill Sealer Gasket: Specified in Section 06100 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 A. INSTALLATION Install materials and systems in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and approved submittals. Install materials and systems in proper relation with adjacent 07200 - 1 Children of America CITY, STATE Issue Date 08.10.10 Version 2.0 INSULATION construction. Coordinate with work of other sections. Provide full thickness in one layer over entire area, tightly fitting around penetrations. B. For all wall insulation, place insulation into all cavities; take great care to provide uniform coverage at correct density and thickness to obtain specified R-Value. C. Lightly stuff batt insulation, without compressing the material, into small gaps in wall, roof, and other framing; around window and exterior door frames; into concealed cavities on exterior walls, and behind all pre-drywall areas on exterior surfaces. D. Vapor Barrier- Walls: Place 4-mil polyethylene vapor barrier on each wall exposed to the exterior, or otherwise noted on the drawings as receiving insulation with an R-Value of 19 or greater. Vapor barrier to be applied to the interior face of such walls, and shall be lapped not less than 12 inches with each lap occurring over a stud. Repair all tears, gaps, holes, or other imperfections prior to application of wall finish. E. Vapor Barrier- Slabs: Place 6-mil polyethylene vapor barrier beneath entire area of concrete slab. Minimum laps to be 12 inches. Extend vapor barrier to lap over the back of perimeter insulation and extend to outside face of foundation wall. F. Masonry Veneer Backing: Install weatherproof backing on the exterior face of all wall sheathing behind masonry veneer. 1. Asphalt Felt: Install asphalt in shingle fashion. Backing shall be installed to counterflash all embedded masonry flashing, base course flashing, membrane flashing, and all other ledge or lintel flashing to provide a complete moisture barrier and directed moisture route from top of wall outward to all weep holes. G. Sill Sealer Gasket: Install continuous sill sealer gasket, without breaks, tears, or gaps on all exterior walls between bottom wall plate and foundation. Use sill gasket width to match wall thickness. Place ribbed side down. END OF SECTION 07200 - 2 Children of America CITY, STATE Issue Date 08.10.10 Version 2.0 INSULATION SECTION 07310 - SHINGLES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Provide shingle roofing and accessories as follows: Asphalt-Fiberglass shingles. 90 pound Mineral Surface Roll roofing No. 15 Asphalt Roofing Felt 40 mil adhesive-backed eave, rake and valley roofing flashing Miscellaneous edge flashing, trim, and accessories. Temporary Waterproofing 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with governing codes and regulations. Provide products of acceptable manufacturers which have been in satisfactory use in similar service for three years. Use experienced installers. Deliver, handle, and store materials in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 A. MATERIALS Asphalt laminated “dimensional” shingles with a fiberglass base, UL Class A, Type I having a ceramic granule surface and a fiberglass mat, and complying with ASTM D3462. Each bundle shall be labeled by Underwriter’s Laboratories as “Class A”. 1. Style: Laminated “dimensional-type” construction 2. Warranty: Not less than 30 years 3. Algae resistance: Integral algae-relief formulation 4. Color: To be selected by Architect from mfgs. standard colors 5. Manufacturer & Style: Elk Style No. P-30 AR Raised Profile “Prestique 30” or equal products by GAF. Timberline 30 AR; Owens-Corning, Oakridge PRO AR 30, CertainTeed, Landmark 30 AR; Tamko, Heritage 30AR, . B. Starter Material: 36 inch wide mineral surfaced fiberglass roll-roofing weighing 90 pounds per 100 square feet. Mineral surface to match shingles. C. Valley Material: 18 and 36 inch wide mineral surfaced fiberglass roll-roofing weighing 90 pounds per 100 square feet. Mineral surface to match shingles. D. Roofing felt: Type II No. 30 asphalt impregnated felt paper meeting ASTM D 226-97a, non-perforated or Type I No. 15, unperforated asphalt-saturated roofing felt conforming to ASTM D-226. E. Eave, Rake and Valley Flashing: minimum 36 inch wide adhesive-backed membrane, 40 mils, ASTM D903, ASTM E96, ASTM D1970, manufactured by W.R. Grace “Ice & Water Shield”, Celotex “Celo-Guard”; or Owens Corning “WeatherLock”;. F. Eave Edge and Rake Edge: pre-formed aluminum edge trim to completely conceal exposed edge of all roof sheathing. Install to form a counterflashing lap or to lap fascia, gutter, or other metal trim. 07310 - 1 Children of America CITY, STATE Issue Date 08.10.10 Version 2.0 SHINGLES G. Temporary Waterproofing: Use any single ply membrane material that will protect building interior until permanent roofing membrane, shingles, and flashing are completed. H. Fasteners and accessories: Non-corrosive, in strict accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. Staples are not permitted. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install materials and systems in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and approved submittals. Install materials and systems in proper relation with adjacent construction and with uniform appearance. Coordinate with work of other sections. B. Install adhesive-backed eave. rake and valley flashing membrane by applying directly to dry, clean wood roof sheathing with minimum of 4 inch laps. Install membrane from the gutter board to a point 36 inches from the gutter. Locate membrane where shown on Drawings. C. Install asphalt felt paper over entire shingled roof surface with minimum head lap of 2 inches and minimum end lap of 6 inches. Stagger end laps. D. Install shingle starter material using 90# roll roofing, 36 inches wide, with 12 inch end laps. Install continuous at all eaves. E. Intersection of Shingles with SBS Modified Bituminous membrane: See Details on Drawings and comply with Soprema recommendations and Section 07530. F. 3.02 Restore damaged components. Clean and protect work from damage. TEMPORARY WATERPROOFING A. Install membrane over all areas of roofing to prevent entrance of moisture during interior construction and prior to placement of permanent roofing material. B. Maintain temporary waterproofing until permanent roofing is installed. C. If using adhesive-backed waterproofing membrane on flat roof portions, use a material approved by the Architect. Most adhesive-backed waterproofing can be left in place when permanent roofing is applied. END OF SECTION 07310 - 2 Children of America CITY, STATE Issue Date 08.10.10 Version 2.0 SHINGLES G U I D E- S P E C Sure-Weld® TPO MECHANICALLY-FASTENED ROOFING SYSTEM April 2006 This GUIDE-SPEC is a brief outline of Carlisle's SureWeld Mechanically-Fastened Roofing System requirements and is intended for use as a submittal with a bid package. Specifiers and the Carlisle Authorized Roofing Applicator must comply with the "Design Criteria" and "Application" sections of Carlisle's Specifications prior to design or bid. PART I GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION The Sure-Weld Mechanically-Fastened Roofing System incorporates 12’, 10' or 8' wide, white, gray or tan 45, 60, 72 or 80mil thick scrim-reinforced Sure-Weld Thermoplastic Polyolefin (TPO) membrane. Insulation is mechanically fastened to an acceptable roof deck. Sure-Weld perimeter sheets (6', 5' or 4' wide respectively) are installed along the building edges and field membrane sheets are mechanically fastened to the roof deck with the appropriate Carlisle Fasteners and Fastening Plates. Adjoining sheets of Sure-Weld membrane are overlapped and joined together with a minimum 1-1/2" wide hot air weld. Refer to the "Design Criteria" section for the required number of perimeter membrane sheets and the required fastener spacing. B. C. This roofing system must be installed by a Carlisle Authorized Roofing Applicator in compliance with shop drawings as approved by Carlisle. There must be no deviations made without the PRIOR WRITTEN APPROVAL of Carlisle. Upon completion of the installation, an inspection will be conducted by a Field Service Representative of Carlisle to ascertain that the membrane roofing system has been installed according to Carlisle's published specifications and details applicable at the time of bid. This roofing system meets Underwriters Laboratories (UL) and Factory Mutual (FM) requirements. For specific code approvals achieved with this roofing system, refer to the Sure-Weld Code Approval Guide, Factory Mutual Approval Guide or Underwriters Fire Resistance and Roofing Materials and Systems Directories. To ensure compliance with Carlisle’s warranty requirements, the following projects should be forwarded to Carlisle for review prior to installation, preferably prior to bid. 1. Projects where a wind speed warranty coverage greater than 55 MPH peak gusts is specified. 2. Projects where the building height exceeds 50'. 600319 4. Air pressurized buildings, canopies and buildings with large openings where the total wall opening exceeds 10% of the total wall area where openings are located. 5. Cold storage buildings and freezer facilities. 6. Projects where the membrane is expected to come in direct contact with petroleum-based products or other chemicals. B. Along with the project submittals (shop drawing and Request for Warranty), when fastener pullout values do not meet the requirements listed in the Carlisle specification, test results with the appropriate Carlisle fastener must be submitted by the roofing contractor for review. C. For all projects (prior to project inspection by Carlisle) a final shop drawing must be approved by Carlisle. A. Deliver materials to the job site in the original, unopened containers labeled with the manufacturer's name, brand name and installation instructions. B. Store Sure-Weld membrane in the original undisturbed plastic wrap. C. Job site storage temperatures in excess of 90° F may affect shelf life of curable materials (i.e., adhesives and sealants). D. When liquid adhesives and sealants are exposed to lower temperatures, restore to a minimum of 60° Fahrenheit before use. E. Do not store adhesive containers with opened lids due to the loss of solvent, which will occur from flash off. F. Insulation and underlay-ment must be stored so it is kept dry and is protected from the elements. Store insulation on a skid and completely cover with a breathable material such as tarp or canvas. If the insulation is lightweight, it should be weighted to prevent possible wind damage. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Projects with fasteners specified to exceed 12". 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. 3. 1.05 JOB CONDITIONS A. 1 This system must not be applied on projects where the slope exceeds 18" in one horizontal foot. When the roof slope exceeds 5" SWMF Guide - 42006 per horizontal foot, use of an automatic welding machine may be more difficult. A hand held welder should be specified. B. Existing roofing material must be investigated by the specifier and all wet material must be removed. C. Existing phenolic insulation and sprayed-in-place urethane roofs must be removed prior to installation of this system. D. The use of a vapor retarder to protect insulation and reduce moisture accumulation within an insulated assembly should be investigated by the specifier. Consult the publications by ASHRAE (American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc.) and NRCA (National Roofing Contractors Association) for specific information. E. 2.03 RELATED MATERIALS Sure-Weld Non-Reinforced or Reinforced Flashing, Bonding Adhesive, Cut Edge Sealant, Water Cut-Off Mastic, PT 304 Sealant, EP-95 Spicing Cement, Weathered Membrane Cleaner, Molded Pocket Sealant, Heat Weldable Walkway Pads, PreMolded Inside/Outside Corners, Pipe Flashings, Curb Wraps and Sealant Pockets. PART III 3.01 GENERAL A. When feasible, begin the application at the highest point of the highest roof level and work to the lowest point to prevent moisture infiltration and to minimize construction traffic on completed sections. This will include completion of all flashings, terminations and daily seals. B. Follow criteria outlined in the "Design Criteria" section to prepare the roof deck or the existing substrate prior to the application of the new roofing system. Coordination between trades is essential to avoid unnecessary traffic over sections of the roof and to prevent damage to the membrane roofing system. 1.06 WARRANTY All warranties are available for commercial projects only. A. A 5 or 10 year Membrane System Warranty, with a wind speed coverage of up to 55 mph is available for a charge. B. A 10 or 15-year Golden Seal™ Total System Warranty is available for a charge on projects which utilize all components manufactured or marketed by Carlisle. These projects will receive a standard maximum peak gust wind speed coverage up to 55 miles per hour. 3.02 ROOF DECK CRITERIA Roofing systems may be eligible for a Total System Warranty with a peak gust wind speed coverage greater than 55 mph. For criteria required to obtain such coverage, refer to the 10 or 15-year Extended Wind Speed Criteria Attachment in the Sure-Seal/Sure-White EPDM Roofing System “Design Criteria” Specification. C. A 20-year Total System Warranty is available for a charge for projects utilizing minimum 60-mil thick Sure-Weld membrane and incorporating additional design enhancements as outlined in “Attachment IV”, 20-Year Warranty Design Enhancements, in the Sure-Weld Design Criteria Specification. PART II 2.01 PRODUCTS A. Proper substrate shall be provided by the building owner. The structure shall be sufficient to withstand normal construction loads and live loads. B. Defects in the roof deck must be reported and documented to the specifier, general contractor and building owner for assessment. The Carlisle Authorized Applicator shall not proceed with installation unless defects are corrected. C. Acceptable decks and the applicable Carlisle Fasteners: 1. Steel, 22 gauge or heavier - Carlisle HP-X Fasteners/Piranha Plates or HP-Xtra Fasteners/Piranha Xtra Plates are required with a minimum pullout of 500 pounds per fastener. 2. Lightweight Insulating Concrete over steel - Carlisle HP-X Fasteners/Piranha Plates are required with a minimum pullout of 360 pounds per fastener (into steel deck below the lightweight concrete). 3. Structural Concrete, rated 3,000 psi or greater – Carlisle CD-10 or HD 14-10 Fasteners (with Piranha Plates) are required with a minimum pullout of 800 pounds per fastener. 4. Wood Plank, minimum 15/32 thick Plywood - Carlisle HP-X Fasteners/Piranha Plates are required 5. On oriented strand board (OSB) decks, HP-X Fasteners and Pirahna Plates may be used providing a pullout of 360 pounds can be obtained. Please contact Carlisle's Systems Design and Review Group sheet sizing and fastener spacing. 6. Cementitious Wood Fiber and Gypsum - The Carlisle HP-NTB Fastener is required with a minimum pullout of 300 pounds. GENERAL The components of this roofing system are to be products of Carlisle or accepted by Carlisle as compatible. The installation, performance or integrity of products by others, when selected by the specifier and accepted by Carlisle, is not the responsibility of Carlisle and is expressly disclaimed by the Carlisle Warranty. 2.02 MEMBRANE Sure-Weld white, gray or tan 45, 60, 72, 80-mil thick reinforced Thermoplastic Polyolefin (TPO) membrane is used for this system. Field membrane sheets are 12’, 10' or 8' wide by 100' long based on project conditions. Perimeter sheets are 6' wide (used with 12' field sheets), 5' wide (used with 10' field sheets) or 4' wide (used with 8' field sheets). For physical properties of membrane, refer to page 4. 600319 EXECUTION 2 SWMF Guide - 42006 5. 3.03 SUBSTRATE PREPARATION A. On retrofit-recover projects, cut and remove wet insulation, as identified by specifier, and fill all voids with new insulation so it is relatively flush with existing surface. B. For all projects, substrate must be even without noticeable high spots or depressions, and must be free of accumulated water, ice or snow. C. C. Refer to the applicable Material Safety Data Sheets and Technical Data Bulletins for applicable cautions and warnings. a. For HP Recovery Board or minimum 1-1/2" thick Polyisocyanurate, a minimum of 5 fasteners and plates per 4' x 8' board are required. b. For Polyisocyanurate less than 1-1/2" thick or Foamular or DOW Extruded Polystyrene, any thickness, a minimum of 6 fasteners and plates per 4' x 8' board are required. c. 2. Extruded polystyrene insulation is for use directly under white Sure-Weld membrane only. E. Insulation boards 4' x 4', regardless of thickness, must be fastened at the minimum rate of 1 fastener and plate every 4 square feet. 2. 3. 4. 1. Flash all walls and curbs with Sure-Weld reinforced membrane. Non-Reinforced membrane shall be limited to inside and outside corners, field fabricated pipe seals, scuppers and Sealant Pockets where the use of premolded accessories are not practical. Terminate the flashing in accordance with an appropriate Carlisle SW9 Termination Detail. 2. On vertical surfaces, such as walls, curbs and pipes, Bonding Adhesive is not required when the flashing height is 12" or less and the membrane is terminated under a metal counterflashing (nailed). When a coping or termination bar is used for vertical terminations, Bonding Adhesive may be eliminated for flashing heights 18" or less. Other Related Work 1. Walkways are required for all traffic concentration points (i.e., roof hatches, access doors, rooftop ladders, etc.), regardless of traffic frequency. Walkways are also required if regular maintenance (once a month or more) is necessary to service rooftop equipment. Walkways are considered a maintenance item and are excluded from the Carlisle Warranty. 2. Sure-Weld Heat Weldable Walkway Rolls are required when walkway pads are specified and are heat welded to the Sure-Weld Membrane. Carlisle Piranha Plates, Seam Fastening Plates (2" diameter) or Insulation Fastening Plates (3" diameter) must be used with appropriate Carlisle Fastener for insulation attachment. Membrane Placement, Attachment and Hot Air Welding 1. Membrane Flashing Carlisle Insulation shall be mechanically fastened to the roof deck as follows: Note: B. D. Insulation Attachment 1. Additional Membrane Securement The membrane must be secured at the perimeter of each roof level, roof section, expansion joint, curb, skylight, interior wall, penthouse, etc., at any angle change which exceeds 2" in one horizontal foot and at all other penetrations in accordance with Carlisle's Details published with Carlisle's Specifications. Clear the substrate of debris and foreign material. Fresh bitumen based roof cement must be removed or concealed. 3.04 INSTALLATION A. A minimum of one perimeter sheet shall be installed at edges of each roof level and 12’, 10' or 8' wide membrane shall be installed in the field of the roof. When concrete pavers are used, they shall be loose laid and installed in conjunction with a slip sheet of reinforced membrane or two layers of HP Protective Mat. Concrete pavers are not recommended when the roof slope is greater than 2" per 1 horizontal foot. Membrane sheets shall be mechanically fastened with the appropriate Carlisle Fastener/Fastening Plate spaced 6" to 12" on center, depending on project criteria, within the membrane splice. Refer to the "Design Criteria" section for required number of perimeter membrane sheets and fastener spacing. Overlap adjacent membrane sheets approximately 5-1/2" at those locations where Fastening Plates are located (along length of the membrane) and a minimum of 2" at end roll sections (width of the membrane). Carlisle Interlocking Pavers™, 24" X 24" X 2", weighing approximately 6 pounds per square foot may be loose laid directly over the membrane. Installation instruction sheets are available from Carlisle. 3. Hot air weld the membrane sheets a minimum of 1-1/2” with an Automatic Hot Air Welding Machine. 600319 Membrane that has been exposed to the elements for approximately 7 days must be prepared with Weathered Membrane Cleaner. Wipe the surface where Weathered Membrane Cleaner has been applied with a clean, dry HP Splice Wipe or other white rag to remove cleaner residue prior to hot air welding. 3 Copings, counterflashing and other metal work, not supplied by Carlisle, shall be fastened to prevent metal from pulling free or buckling and sealed to prevent moisture from entering the roofing system or building. SWMF Guide - 42006 Attach copies of the applicable Carlisle Details that pertain to the individual project to complete a bid package submittal. Membrane Physical Properties Test Method Property (Metric-SI Units) Tolerance on Nominal Thickness, % Thickness Over Scrim, min, in. (mm) ASTM D 751 ASTM D 4637 Optical Method Solar Spectrum Reflectometer ASTM E 408 Solar Reflectance (albedo X 100), % (Min. for ENERGY STAR approval is 65% Emittance, infrared Breaking Strength, min, lbf (kN) Elongation at Break of Fabric, min, % Tearing Strength, min, lbf (N) 8" by 8" speciman Brittleness Point, max, °F (°C) ASTM D 751 Grab Method ASTM D 751 ASTM D 751 B Tongue Tear ASTM D 2137 ASTM D 1204 Linear Dimensional Change (shrinkage), % Ozone Resistance, 100 pphm, 168 hours ASTM D 1149 Resistance to Water Absorption After 7 days immersion @ 158°F (70°C) Change in mass, max, % Resistance to microbial surface growth, rating (1 is very poor, 10 is no growth) Field seam strength, lbf/in. (kN/m) Seam tested in peel ASTM D 471 Water vapor permeance, Perms Puncture resistance, lbf (N) Property of Unaged Sheet 45 or 60-mil 45 or 60-mil ±10 45-mil 60-mil 0.015 (0.381) ±10 0.020 (0.508) ±10 White - 87 Typ. Tan - 68 Typ. 0.92 Typ. 45-mil 60-mil 225 (1.0) Min. 250 (1.1) Min. 320 (1.4) Typ. 360 (1.6) Typ. 25 Typ. 55 (245) Min. 130 (578) Typ. -40 (-40) Min. -50 (-46) Typ. +/- .05 max. -0.2 Typ. No Cracks 45-mil 225 (1.0) Min. 320 (1.4) Typ. 60-mil 250 (1.1) Min. 360 (1.6) Typ. 25 Typ. 55 (245) Min. 130 (578) Typ. No Cracks 4.0 Max. 2.0 Typ. ASTM D 3274 2 yr. S. Florida ASTM D1876 9 – 10 Typ. 25 (4.4) Min. 60 (10.5) Typ. 0.10 Max. 0.05 Typ. ASTM E 96 FTM 101C Method 2031 PropertyAfter Aging (1) 28 days @ 240° F 45-mil 60-mil 250 (1.1) Min. 300(1.3) Min. 325 (1.4) Typ. 350 (1.6) Typ. No Cracks No loss of breaking or tearing strength ASTM G 155 Resistance to xenon-arc Weathering (2) 0.70 W/m Xenon-Arc, 10,080 kJ/m total radiant exposure, Visual condition at 10X 80°C B.P.T. (1) Aging conditions are 28 days at 240° F (116° C) equivalent to 400 days at 176° F (80° C) for breaking strength, elongation, tearing strength, linear dimensional change, ozone and puncture resistance. (2) Approximately equivalent to 8000 hours exposure at 0.35W/m . Note: For Physical Properties of the 72 and 80-mil Sure-Weld membrane, refer to the Sure-Weld Design Criteria Specification, Attachment I. Copyright 2006 Carlisle SynTec Incorporated Carlisle, Sure-Weld, Interlocking Pavers are Trademarks of Carlisle SynTec Incorporated. Foamular is a Trademark of UC Industries, Inc. Carlisle SynTec Incorporated, P. O. Box 7000, Carlisle, PA 17013-0295 Phone: 800-479-6832 http://www.carlisle-syntec.com 600319 4 SWMF Guide - 42006 SECTION 07600 – FLASHING, SHEET METAL & METAL TRIM PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. 1.03 Provide flashing and sheet metal components for building construction. 1. Masonry through-wall flashing. 2. Metal counter-flashing. 3. Gutter, Downspout & System. 4. Exposed metal trim units. 5. Miscellaneous sheet metal accessories. Submit for approval samples, shop drawings, product data, 12-inch samples of gutter and downspout. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with governing codes and regulations. Provide products of acceptable manufacturers which have been in satisfactory use in similar service for three years. Use experienced installers. Deliver, handle, and store materials in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. B. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Standard: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Conform to dimensions and profiles shown unless more stringent requirements are indicated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GUTTER DOWNSPOUT SYSTEM A. System Description 1. 2.02 [XXXXXXXX] OTHER MATERIALS A. Flashing: Acceptable material for flashing conditions. Specific application noted on drawings. 1. Weatherproof Backing: Specified in Section 06100. 2. Visible Masonry Flashing: Specified in Section 04200 3. Concealed Masonry Flashing: Specified in Section 04200 4. Other Concealed Flashing: For other flashing not exposed to the exterior, use one of the following, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings a. Copper: 10-oz./sq. ft. weight or 0.0135 inch thick; ASTM B 370 16oz./sq. ft. weight or 0.0216 inch thick elsewhere. b. Copper-Laminated Flashing: Manufacturer's standard laminated flashing consisting of 5-oz./sq. ft. sheet copper bonded with asphalt between 2 layers of glass-fiber cloth. Use only where flashing is fully concealed in masonry. 07600 - 1 Children of America CITY, STATE Issue Date 08.10.10 Version 2.0 FLASHING & SHEET METAL c. 5. 6. 7. Asphalt-Coated Copper Flashing: Manufacturer's standard product consisting of 5-oz./sq. ft. sheet copper coated with flexible asphalt. Use only where flashing is fully concealed in masonry. d. Rubberized-Asphalt Flashing: Manufacturer's standard composite flashing product consisting of a pliable and highly adhesive rubberized-asphalt compound, bonded to a high-density, crosslaminated polyethylene film to produce an overall thickness of 0.040 inch e. EPDM Flashing: Manufacturer's standard flashing product formed from a terpolymer of ethylene-propylene diene, complying with ASTM D 4637, and 0.040 inch thick. Intersection of Shingles with Vertical Surfaces: a. For Concealed Areas: Use aluminum step flashing (0.019") 20 gage alloy 3003 clear aluminum, tensile strength 16,000 psi, ASTM B 209. b. For Exposed Areas: Use copper step or continuous flashing. Material Specified in Section 04200. Eave, Rake and Valley Flashing: Specified in Section 07310 Flat Roof Edge Flashing: Specified in Section 07530, PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 3.02 GENERAL A. Follow recommendations of SMACNA manual. Allow for expansion. Isolate dissimilar materials. B. Install materials and systems in accordance with SMACNA recommendations and approved submittals. Install materials and systems in proper relation with adjacent construction, and with uniform appearance. Coordinate with work of other sections. C. Restore damaged components and finishes. Clean and protect work from damage. FLASHING INSTALLATION A. Coordinate flashing installation for the following areas. Refer to Drawings for specific locations, and paths of flashing membranes. Provide necessary laps, and counterflashing for any areas not specifically identified on Drawings or in these Specifications: 1. Window and Door Head Flashing: Install copper flashing extending from front edge of trim or lintel, up and over trim or lintel and up the face of the wall sheathing at least 4 inches. This 4 inch vertical leg of flashing shall fastened to the face of sheathing, and be counterflashed with exterior wall flashing. Metal flashing shall be turned down on exterior exposed length to form a drip edge. Do not seal or caulk between the drip edge and the lintel. 2. Exterior Wall Flashing (weatherproof backing): Asphalt felt described in Section 06100. Install on surface of all wall sheathing. Lap membrane to form a continuous drainage surface (shingle fashion) from top of wall at eave to masonry base course. Lap over all other embedded masonry flashing to form a counterflashing. Coordinate installation of all flashing to provide a continuous path of moisture removal from masonry air space and outward through weep holes. 3. Masonry Base Flashing: See Section 04200 07600 - 2 Children of America CITY, STATE Issue Date 08.10.10 Version 2.0 FLASHING & SHEET METAL 4. 5. 6. 7. B. Eave, Rake and Valley Flashing: Apply adhesive-backed membrane, 40 mils, on all roof edges, eaves, rakes, valleys, and other areas shown on the Drawings Eave Edge and Rake Edge Flashing: Premolded metal edge trim. See Section 07310 for roofing underlayment on Eaves and Rake edges. Flat Roof Flashing: See Section 07530 Pipes and Vents: All pipes and vents passing through the roof or wall shall be sealed and flashed to assure protection against the entry of water. Use appropriate materials, storm collars, compression bands, or pre-formed gaskets approved for use and acceptable to roofing manufacturer. Provide necessary laps, and counterflashing for any areas not specifically identified on Drawings or in these END OF SECTION 07600 - 3 Children of America CITY, STATE Issue Date 08.10.10 Version 2.0 FLASHING & SHEET METAL SECTION 07900 - JOINT SEALERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. 1.02 A. Provide sealants at intersection of building components and at control and expansion joints. QUALITY ASSURANCE Comply with governing codes and regulations. Provide products of acceptable manufacturers which have been in satisfactory use in similar service for three years. Use experienced installers. Deliver, handle, and store materials in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 A. MATERIALS Joints designed for expansion and movement conditions at site: 1. Exterior joints on vertical surfaces: Non-sag polyurethane; Pecora Dynatrol II or Tremco Dymeric or approved equal. 2. Horizontal paving joints, interior and exterior: Self-leveling polyurethane; Tremco THC 900 or approved equal. 3. Toilet fixture joints: Silicone rubber; Tremco Proglaze or Dow 786 or approved equal. 4. Interior joints: Acrylic latex; Tremco Acrylic Latex or approved equal. 5. Pre-compressed expanding sealant tape; Emseal PC-SA or equal. 6. Pavement joint filler: Resilient, premolded asphalt impregnated fiberboard. 7. Primers, bond breakers, and backer rods compatible with sealant and adjacent surfaces. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Examine substrate; report unsatisfactory conditions in writing. Beginning work means acceptance of substrates. B. Provide sealants in colors as selected from manufacturer’s standards. C. Install materials and systems in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and approved submittals. Install materials and systems in proper relation with adjacent construction and with uniform appearance. Coordinate with work of other sections. Clean and prime joints, and install bond breakers, backer rods and sealant as recommended by manufacturers. D. Depth shall equal width up to 1/2" wide; depth shall equal 1/2 width for joints over 1/2" wide. E. Cure and protect sealants as directed by manufacturers. Replace or restore damaged sealants. Clean adjacent surfaces to remove spillage. END OF SECTION 07900 - 1 Children of America CITY, STATE Issue Date 08.10.10 Version 2.0 JOINT SEALERS SECTION 08110 - STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. B. D. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. 1.03 Provide hollow metal steel doors Provide hollow metal steel frames for doors Provide hollow metal steel frames for interior windows Submit for architect's approval samples, shop drawings, and manufacturer's product data on all components. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with governing codes and regulations. Provide products of acceptable manufacturers which have been in satisfactory use in similar service for three years. Use experienced installers. Deliver, handle, and store materials in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. B. Steel Doors and Frames in this section must meet all standards as established by the following listing. 1. Door and Hardware Preparation ANSI 115. 2. Life Safety Codes NFPA-101 (Latest edition). 3. Steel Door Institute ANSI/SDI-100 (Latest edition) PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Door Manufacturers 1. Fleming Steel Doors and Frames, Addison, IL (888) 309-9089 2. Ceco Door Products, Brentwood, TN (615) 661-5030 3. Steelcraft, Cincinnati, OH (513) 745-6400 B. Hollow Metal Frame Manufacturers 1. Fleming Steel Doors and Frames, Addison, IL (888) 309-9089. 2. Ceco Door Products, Brentwood, TN (615) 661-5030 3. Steelcraft, Cincinnati, OH (513) 745-6400 C. Exterior Doors: 1-3/4" thick steel. 1. Insulated exterior doors, 18 gage, Grade II, Heavy-duty, ASTM A 526 steel with galvanizing in accordance with ASTM A 653, embossed face sheets, top and bottom stiffeners, hardware reinforcements meeting SDI100, door core of foamed-in-place or laminated polyurethane insulation, 20 psi strength, 1.8 pcf density, 1/2 inch maximum voids in any direction. Strength of bond between core and steel face sheet shall exceed strength of core so delamination will not occur during operation conditions. Minimum insulation value of R-10. 2. For exterior doors with glass panels, use interior or internal muntins. 3. Provide a top cap on all exterior doors 4. Provide door styles shown on Drawings. 08110 - 1 Children of America CITY, STATE Issue Date 08.10.10 Version 2.0 STEEL DOORS & FRAMES 2.02 2.03 E. Hollow Metal Frames: Cold-rolled steel sheet, gage as follows: 1. Exterior Frames: 16 gage 2 inch profile for installation on metal or wood stud exterior wall framing with masonry veneer. Coordinate frame configuration to provide closure of brick air space without use of additional closure trim. Construct and install frames in accordance with SDI 105 with mitered corners and fully welded. Galvanized or otherwise coated for rust protection. 2. Interior Frames: 16 gage, 2 inch profile, for installation on a metal or wood stud and gypsum board partition. Construct frames in accordance with SDI 105, with mitered corners and fully welded. 3. Interior View Panel 16 gage ASTM A 526 steel interior frames; removable glass stops for 1/4 inch safety tempered panels. Construct and install frames in accordance with SDI 105 with mitered corners and fully welded. F. Rubber Silencers: Provide three resilient rubber silencers for each door except for fully weatherstripped doors not requiring such silencers. G. Louvers: Sightproof, stationary type, 24 gage cold rolled steel in 20 gage frame. HARDWARE LOCATIONS AND REINFORCEMENTS A. Locate hardware on doors and frames in accordance with the manufacturer’s standard location. B. When steel frames are used with wood doors, the hardware preparation on the door is governed by the location on the frame. If the doors are factory mortised, the door supplier is responsible for coordinating hardware locations. C. Hardware reinforcements are to be in accordance with the minimum standard gages as listed in SDI-100. D. Doors shall be machined to receive hardware, reinforced and function holes provided at the factory in accordance with the hardware schedule and templates provided by the hardware supplier. FINISHES A. Finish: Doors and frames are to be cleaned, and chemically treated to insure maximum finish paint adhesion. All surfaces of the door and frame exposed to view shall receive a factory-applied coat of rust inhibiting primer. The finish to meet the requirements for acceptance stated in ANSI A250.10 “Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces.” The prime finish is not intended to be the final layer of protection from the elements. B. Field finishes: See Section 09900 for coatings. See APPENDIX for color. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL 08110 - 2 Children of America CITY, STATE Issue Date 08.10.10 Version 2.0 STEEL DOORS & FRAMES A. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Frames 1. Prior to installation, all frames must be checked for rack, twist and out of square conditions. 2. Place interior frames prior to enclosing walls and ceilings. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. Remove shipping bar spreader and insert a wood spreader cut to the opening width, notched to clear the stops. 3. SDI-105, “Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames” and SDI110 “Standard Steel Doors and Frames for Modular Masonry Construction” shall indicate the proper installation procedures. 4. Recess exterior frames from the exterior finished face of brick veneer a consistent distance shown on the Drawings. B. Doors 1. Install doors plumb and in true alignment in a prepared opening and fasten them to achieve the maximum operational effectiveness and appearance. 2. Proper door clearance must be maintained in accordance with SDI - 110. 3. Where necessary, only metal hinge shims are acceptable to maintain clearances. 4. “Installation Guide for Doors and Hardware” published by DHI is recommended for further details. C. 3.03 Fabricate work to be rigid, neat and free from seams, defects, dents, warp, buckle, and exposed fasteners. Install doors and frames in compliance with SDI-105 "Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames", SDI-100, SDI110 "Standard Steel Doors and Frames for Modular Masonry Construction", and NFPA 80. Hardware shall be applied in accordance with hardware manufacturer’s templates and instructions. ADJUST AND CLEAN A. Check and re-adjust operating finish hardware items in hollow metal work just prior to final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper condition. B. Immediately after erection, sand smooth any rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply to touch-up or compatible air-drying primer and final coating touch-up to match. END OF SECTION 08110 - 3 Children of America CITY, STATE Issue Date 08.10.10 Version 2.0 STEEL DOORS & FRAMES SECTION 08305 - ACCESS DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 A. 1.02 A. 1.03 A. SUMMARY Provide access doors or panels for access to valves, controls, and concealed items requiring maintenance. SUBMITTALS Submit for approval shop drawings, product data. QUALITY ASSURANCE Comply with governing codes and regulations. Provide products of acceptable manufacturers which have been in satisfactory use in similar service for three years. Use experienced installers. Deliver, handle, and store materials in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Doors: 20 gage recessed steel panel doors to accept field finish of drywall or tile; cam locks. B. Frames: 16 gage with concealed flanges for drywall and tile; and 1" exposed flanges for installation into concrete or masonry. C. Primed finish for field finish. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer’s installation instructions. Install plumb, level and square. B. Coordinate installation and field finishing with work of other trades. C. Adjust hardware and operation. Repair or replace damaged units. END OF SECTION 08305 - 1 Children of America CITY, STATE Issue Date 08.10.10 Version 2.0 ACCESS DOORS SECTION 08620 – VINYL WINDOWS PART 1 1.01 SUMMARY A. 1.02 GENERAL Provide vinyl windows where shown on the drawings, complete in place with finish hardware installed, as specified herein, and as needed for a complete and proper installation. REFERENCES A. General: Standards listed by reference, including revisions by issuing authority, form a part of this specification section to the extent indicated. Standards listed are identified by issuing authority, authority abbreviation, designation number, title or other designation established by issuing authority. Standards subsequently referenced herein are referred to by issuing authority abbreviation and standard designation. B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): 1. ANSI/AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2 Voluntary Specifications for Aluminum, Vinyl (PVC) and Wood Windows and Glass Doors. C. Insulating Glass Certification Council (IGCC): 1. Requirements for Class CBA. D. National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST): 1. Voluntary Product Standard PS1. E. National Fenestration Rating Council (NFRC): 1. NFRC 100 Procedure for Determining Fenestration Product Thermal Properties. 2. NFRC 200 Procedure for Determining Solar Heat Gain Coefficient. F. Window and Door Manufacturers Association (WDMA), (formerly National Wood Window & Door Association (NWWDA)): 1. WDMA Industry Standard I.S.4 Industry Standard for Water-Repellent Preservative Non-Pressure Treated for Millwork. 1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Performance Requirements: Provide products/systems that have been manufactured, fabricated and installed to the following performance criteria: 1. Test to ANSI/AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2. a. Performance Grade: DP30 2. U-Factor: .50. 3. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient (SHGC): .51. 4. Outdoor Indoor Transmission Class (OITC): 22. 5. Sound Transmission Class (STC): 27. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s product data and installation instructions. B. Shop Drawings: Provide drawings indicating direction of operable parts, typical jamb, head and sill conditions and special mullion reinforcement details. C. Samples: Submit selection and verification samples, including the following: 1. Hardware: Submit sample indicating typical finish on hardware. 2. Vinyl Cladding: Submit color samples of exterior cladding. D. Quality Assurance/Control Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Performance Data: Provide manufacturer’s published performance data for 08550 - 1 Children of America CITY, STATE Issue Date 08.10.10 Version 2.0 WOOD WINDOWS specified products. E. Closeout Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Warranty documents specified herein. 2. Owner’s Manual: Bound manual clearly identified with project name, location and completion date. Identify type and size of window units installed. Provide recommendations for periodic inspections, care and maintenance. Identify common causes of damage with instructions for temporary repair. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Utilize an installer having demonstrated experience on projects of similar size and complexity. B. Certifications: 1. Insulating Glass Units: Provide insulating glass units permanently marked with certification label of Insulating Glass Certification Council (IGCC) indicating compliance with Class CBA and meeting ASTM E7774 level A. 2. Safety tempered Glass Units: Provide safety tempered glass units permanently etched with certification label showing compliance with ANSI Z97.1-1975 (100 ft/lb) and CPSC-16 CFR 1201.(Cat II) (400 ft/lb) and ASTM C1048, Type 1, Class 1, q3, Kind FT 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING A. General: Comply with Division 1 Product Requirement Section. B. Comply with manufacturer’s ordering instructions and lead time requirements to avoid construction delays. C. Delivery: Deliver materials in manufacturer’s original, unopened, undamaged containers with identification labels intact. D. Storage and Protection: Store materials protected from exposure to harmful environmental conditions and at temperature and humidity conditions recommended by the manufacturer. 1. Store windows and accessories off ground, under cover, protected from weather and construction activities. 1.07 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of openings by field measurement before fabrication. Record measurements on shop drawings. Coordinate field measurements and fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid construction delays. B. Install windows in strict accordance with manufacturer’s safety and weather recommendations. 1.08 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer’s Warranty: Submit, for Owner’s acceptance, manufacturer’s standard limited warranty document. Manufacturer’s warranty is in addition to, and not a limitation of, other rights Owner may have under contract documents. B. Warranty: 1. Non-Prorated Warranty 2. Warranty Period: a. Glass: 20 Years b. Frame, Accessories and all non-glass components: 10 Years 08550 - 2 Children of America CITY, STATE Issue Date 08.10.10 Version 2.0 WOOD WINDOWS PART 2 2.01 PRODUCTS PRODUCTS A. Vinyl clad double-hung tilting wood windows, including the following: 1. Jeld-Wen builders standard nail fin vinyl 2-wide picture windows. a. Basic Unit 7PC7260-2 (71 ½” x 59 ½”) 2.02 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS A. Substitutions: No substitutions permitted. 2.03 MATERIALS A. Frame size: 71 ½” x 59 ½” 1. Color: White. 2. Builders Standard Nail Fin Vinyl 2-Wide Picture Window B. Grid 1. C. Narrow Flat Grid White Colonial Glass 1. Low E, Tempered ¾” OA 2.04 GLAZING A. General: Insulating glass units certified through the Insulating Glass Certification Council and conforming to the requirements of IGCC Class CBA, Provide dual sealed units consisting of polyisobutylene primary seal and silicone secondary seal. Metal spacers to have bent corners. B. Dual-Pane Insulating Glass Units: 1. Glass: Tempered insulating glass units to consist of 2 layers of clear tempered glass conforming to ASTM C1048, Type 1, Class 1, q3, Kind FT. 2. Labeling: Each panel of glazing shall be identified with an etched information mark indicating that it is safety tempered. 3. Filling: Fill space between glass with air. 4. stabilized exterior and interior surfaces. 5. Glazing: Factory glaze with high quality glazing silicone sealant and snap-in rigid vinyl glazing bead. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS A. Comply with the instructions and recommendations of the window] manufacturer. 3.02 EXAMINATION A. Site Verification of Conditions: 1. Verify that site conditions are acceptable for installation of windows including the following: a. Concrete surfaces are dry and free of excess mortar, rocks, sand and other construction debris. b. Rough opening or masonry opening is square and dimensions are correct. 08550 - 3 Children of America CITY, STATE Issue Date 08.10.10 Version 2.0 WOOD WINDOWS c. d. 2. Sill plates are level. Wood frame walls are dry, clean, sound and well nailed, and/or glued, free of voids and without offsets at joints. e. Nail heads are driven flush with all surfaces in opening and within 3 inches (75 mm) of rough opening. Do not proceed with installation of windows until unacceptable conditions are corrected. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Techniques: 1. Remove window components, parts, accessories and installation guides from carton. 2. Inspect window components and verify that components are not damaged and that all parts are included before disposing of carton. B. Rough Opening Furring & Gaskets: 1. Each window rough opening shall be framed with a minimum 3/4 inch thick by 31/2” wide furred mounting surface for nailing fins, providing a window mounting surface 3/4 inches forward of the exterior wall sheathing surface. This furred mounting surface is required to provide closure of the brick veneer air space. 2. After fastening window fins, apply a minimum 8-inch wide adhesive window fin gasket around all four sides of window to cover the window nailing fin and forming a seal between the fin and the backing material. 3. Confirm that all surrounding membranes, flashing, gaskets, and trim are installed in a fashion that will shed water away from the window fins, and toward weep holes and other drainage outlets. C. Interface with Other Work: 1. Install windows level, plumb, square, true to line, without distortion, anchored securely in place to structural support and in proper relation to wall flashing and other adjacent construction. 2. Separate aluminum and other corrodible surfaces from sources of corrosion or electrolytic action at points of contact with other materials. 3. Install insulation in shim space around window perimeter to maintain continuity of building insulation. Do not overfill. 4. Hold back exterior siding or other finish materials from edge of window to allow for expansion and contraction and the installation of a proper sealant joint with backing materials. Seal perimeter of window after exterior finish is applied in accordance with the requirements of related section. 5. Install optional hardware and unit accessories after cleaning. 6. Install a window setting gasket over all window nailing flanges as described in Section 06100. 3.04 CLEANING A. Clean window surfaces immediately after installation using cleaning materials and methods specifically recommended by window manufacturer. 1. Remove excess sealants, glazing materials, dirt and other substances. 2. Avoid damaging protective coatings and finishes. B. Protect window surfaces from masonry cleaning solutions that could damage insulating glass panels or hardware. C. Remove debris from work site and properly dispose of debris. 08550 - 4 Children of America CITY, STATE Issue Date 08.10.10 Version 2.0 WOOD WINDOWS 3.05 PROTECTION A. Protect installed work from damage due to subsequent construction activity on the site. END OF SECTION 08550 - 5 Children of America CITY, STATE Issue Date 08.10.10 Version 2.0 WOOD WINDOWS SECTION 08700 - DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE Door Type Legend A = Full Glass B = Flush C = Half panel glass 6"x30" D = Half panel glass 24"x30" Door Material Legend SCW = Solid Core Wood HM = Hollow Metal AL = Aluminum Frame Type Legend 1 = Standard Hollow Metal 2 = Alum w/ (2) full-sidelights & transom 3 = Hollow Metal w/ (1) full-sidelight R 4 = Hollow Metal w/ (1) full-sidelight L Weatherstripping: Door Bottom Seal: Finger Guards Exterior Entry Door Door D01 3’0" x 7’0" x 1-3/4" A-AL-2 w/ 24” x 64”tempered glass BB1191 4-1/2 x 4-1/2 NRP 626 CD25L x 511L x36" w/ dogging 630 C987 (2ea.) 626 IC CORE C606 (2 ea.) 626 510L trim 630 Von Duprin 1461 x EDA Alum 8427 x 36” saddle type thermal break Alum (set threshold in full asphalt mastic bedding or gasket) 160VA 36” x 84” Alum & Vinyl 35EV x 36” Alum/Vinyl MK1A & MK1B x 84” White SET NO. H-2: Door Size Door Type Hinges 1-1/2 pair Panic Device Closer (Push Side) Weatherstripping: Door Bottom Seal: Door Pull Finger Guards Interior Entry & Access Control Door D02 3’0" x 7’0" x 1-3/4" A-AL-2 w/ 24"x64" tempered glass lite. BB1191 4-1/2 x 4-1/2 NRP 626 N/A supplied and installed by Always Close By 1461 Alum 160VA 36” x 84” Alum & Vinyl 36EV x 36” Alum/Vinyl Alum C type MK1A & MK1B x 84” White SET NO. H-3: Exterior Classroom Egress Door Door Size Door Type Hinges 1-1/2 pair Panic Device Mortise Cylinder IC Core Closer (Push Side) Kick Plate Threshold 3’0" x 7’0" x 1-3/4" C-HM-1 w/ 6"x30" tempered glass BB1191 4-1/2 x 4-1/2 NRP 626 25L X 511L 630 C987 626 IC CORE C606 626 SC70 DS 689 194S 10 x 2LDW 630 8427 x 36” saddle type thermal break Alum (set threshold in full asphalt mastic bedding or gasket) 160VA 36” x 84” Alum & Vinyl 35EV x 36” Alum/Vinyl 16A x DW +4” Alum MK1A & MK1B x 84” White SET NO. H-1: Door Size Door Type Hinges 1-1/2 pair Panic Device Mortise Cylinder IC Core Std Exterior & Trim Closer (Push Side) Threshold Weatherstripping: Door Bottom Seal: Rain Drip Finger Guards Hagar IR/Falcon IR/Falcon IR/Falcon LCN NGP NGP NGP FingerSafe Hagar LCN NGP NGP FingerSafe Door D17A, D18A, D20A, D23A, D24A, D25A Hagar IR/Falcon IR/Falcon IR/Falcon IR/Falcon Hager NGP NGP NGP NGP FingerSafe 08700 - 5 Children of America CITY, STATE Version 1.00 Issue Date 04.07.08 HARDWARE SCHEDULE SECTION 08700 - DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE SET NO. H-4: Door Size Door Type Hinges 1-1/2 pair Panic Device Mortise Cylinder IC Core Closer (Push Side) Kick Plate Threshold Weatherstripping: Door Bottom Seal: Finger Guards Exterior Corridor Egress Door Door D07, D21 3’0" x 7’0" x 1-3/4" C-HM-1 w/ 6"x30" tempered glass BB1191 4-1/2 x 4-1/2 NRP 626 CD25L x 511L 36" w/ dogging 630 C987 (2ea.) 626 IC CORE C606 (2 ea.) 626 SC70 DS 629 194S x 10 x 2LDW 630 8427 x 36” saddle type thermal break Alum (set threshold in full asphalt mastic bedding or gasket) 160VA 36” x 84” Alum & Vinyl 35EV x 36” Alum/Vinyl MK1A & MK1B x 84” White Weatherstripping: Door Bottom Seal: Rain Drip Exterior Mechanical Room Door Door D13 3’0" x 7’0" x 1-3/4" B-HM-1 BB1191 4-1/2 x 4-1/2 NRP 626 ROOM T581HD DANE 626 IC CORE C606 626 SC70 x H CUSH Alum 8427 x 36” saddle type thermal break Alum (set threshold in full asphalt mastic bedding or gasket) 160VA 36” x 84” Alum & Vinyl 35EV x 36” Alum/Vinyl 16A x DW+4” Alum SET NO. H-6: Interior Classroom Corridor Door Door Size Door Type Hinges 1-1/2 pair Lockset Closer (Pull Side) Kick Plate Floor Stop Silencers Finger Guards 3’0" x 7’0" x 1-3/4" C-HM-1 w/ 6"x30" tempered glass lite. BB1279 4-1/2 x 4-1/2 PASSAGE T101S DANE SC70 RW/PA 194S 10 X 2LDW 242F 307D MK1A & MK1B x 84” SET NO. H-7: Door Size Door Type Hinges 1-1/2 pair Office Door Door D03 3’0" x 7’0" x 1-3/4" D-HM-1 w/ 24"x30" tempered glass lite. BB1279 4-1/2 x 4-1/2 626 SET NO. H-5: Door Size Door Type Hinges 1-1/2 pair Lockset STORE IC Core Closer (Push Side) Threshold Hagar IR/Falcon IR/Falcon IR/Falcon IR/Falcon Hager NGP NGP NGP FingerSafe Hagar IR/Falcon IR/Falcon IR/Falcon NGP NGP NGP NGP Door D08, D11, D12, D14, D15, D17, D18, D20, D22, D24, D25, D26, D27 626 626 Alum 630 626 Gray White Hagar IR/Falcon IR/Falcon Hager Hager Hager FingerSafe Hagar 08700 - 6 Children of America CITY, STATE Version 1.00 Issue Date 04.07.08 HARDWARE SCHEDULE SECTION 08700 - DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE Lockset IC Core Floor Stop Silencers Finger Guards Keypad lock FE575 Ply ELAN IC CORE C606 626 242F 307D MK1A & MK1B x 84” 626 Schlage IR/Falcon Hager Hager FingerSafe SET NO. H-8: Door Size Door Type Hinges 1-1/2 pair Lockset STORE IC Core Floor Stop Silencers Finger Guards Closet & Storage Door 3’0" x 7’0" x 1-3/4" B-HM-1 BB1279 4-1/2 x 4-1/2 ROOM T581HD DANE IC CORE C606 626 242F 307D MK1A & MK1B x 84” SET NO. H-9: Door Size Door Type Hinges 1-1/2 pair Lockset Closer (Push Side) Floor Stop Silencers Finger Guards Toilet Room Door – Adult 3’0" x 7’0" x 1-3/4" B-HM-1 BB1279 4-1/2 x 4-1/2 PRIVACY T301S DANE SC 70 RW/PA 242F 307D MK1A & MK1B x 84” Door D09, D19 Undercut Door 1” SET NO. H-11: Toilet Room Door – Children Door Size Door Type Hinges 1-1/2 pair Lockset Floor Stop Silencers Finger Guards 3’0" x 7’0" x 1-3/4" B-HM-1 BB1279 4-1/2 x 4-1/2 PASSAGE T101S DANE 242F 307D MK1A & MK1B x 84” Door D08.1, D11.1, D12.1, D14.1, D15.1, D17.1, D18.1, D20.1, D25.1, D26.1 Undercut Door 1” SET NO. H-12: Door Size Door Type Hinges 1-1/2 pair Lockset STORE Laundry Room Door 3’0" x 7’0" x 1-3/4" B-HM-1 BB1279 4-1/2 x 4-1/2 ROOM T581HD DANE 630 Gray White Door D04, D05, D10 626 626 Hagar IR/Falcon IR/Falcon Hager Hager FingerSafe 630 Gray White 626 626 Alum 630 Gray White Hagar IR/Falcon IR/Falcon Hager Hager FingerSafe 626 626 630 Gray White Hagar IR/Falcon Hager Hager FingerSafe Door D06 626 626 Hagar IR/Falcon 08700 - 7 Children of America CITY, STATE Version 1.00 Issue Date 04.07.08 HARDWARE SCHEDULE SECTION 08700 - DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE IC Core Kick Plate Closer (Push Side) Silencers Finger Guards IC CORE C606 626 194S 10 x 2LDW SC70-H CUSH 307D MK1A & MK1B x 84” SET NO. H-13: Door Size Door Type Hinges 1-1/2 pair Lockset STORE IC Core Closer (Pull Side) Kick Plate Silencers 307 Finger Guards Pantry Door 3’0" x 7’0" x 1-3/4" D-HM-1 w/ 24"x30" tempered glass lite. BB1279 4-1/2 x 4-1/2 ROOM T581HD DANE IC CORE C606 626 SC70-H 90 194S 10” x 34” (Push Side Only) D MK1A & MK1B x 84” SET NO. H-14: Door Size Door Type Hinges 1-1/2 pair Lockset Closer (Pull Side) Floor Stop Silencers Kick Plate Finger Guards Lounge Room Door 3’0" x 7’0" x 1-3/4" C-HM-1 w/ 6"x30" tempered glass lite. BB1279 4-1/2 x 4-1/2 PASSAGE T101S DANE SC70-H 242F 307D 194S 10 X 2LDW MK1A & MK1B x 84” 630 Alum Gray White IR/Falcon Hager IR/Falcon Hager FingerSafe Door D16 626 626 Alum 630 GR White Hagar IR/Falcon IR/Falcon IR/Falcon Hager Hager FingerSafe Door D22 626 626 Alum 626 Gray 630 White Hagar IR/Falcon IR/Falcon Hager Hager Hager FingerSafe PER A NATIONAL ACCOUNT AGREEMENT WITH CHILDREN OF AMERICA ALL HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND HARDWARE FOR THESE DOORS ARE TO BE PURCHASED BT THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR FROM GRITMAN & ASSOCIATES (615)350-6000 CONTACT KAREN BRADY [email protected] END OF SECTION 08700 - 8 Children of America CITY, STATE I Version 1.00 Issue Date 04.07.08 HARDWARE SCHEDULE SECTION 08700 - FINISH HARDWARE PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 A. 1.02 A. 1.03 A. SUMMARY Finish hardware for doors SUBMITTALS Submit for Children of America’s approval complete hardware schedule, with manufacturer's product data, cross-references to door and room numbers, and indication of left-hand/ right-hand installations. Children of America’s review and approval is a prerequisite for ordering hardware, doors, or frames. QUALITY ASSURANCE Comply with governing codes and regulations. Provide products of acceptable manufacturers which have been in satisfactory use in similar service for three years. Use experienced installers. Deliver, handle, and store materials in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. See Hardware Schedule 08700y B. Door Finger Guards: Provide door finger guards consisting of UPVC plastic and nitrile rubber gaskets installed on the inner and outer hinge side of the door. Comply with UL-10B and UL-11B 4-hour door seal rating; NFPA 252; and ASTM E152. Use finger guards manufactured by FingerSafe USA, Inc., 1115 W. Oglethorpe, Savannah, GA 31412 (888) 346-4723; [email protected]. 1. Inner Finger Guard Model MK1A: pleated rigid PVC with TPE flanges, 0,40 inches thick and Retaining Plate of rigid extruded PVC. 2. Outer Finger Guard Model MK1B: 1.10 inch wide rigid PVC with TPE hinges. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Follow guidelines of DHI “Recommended Locations for Builder’s Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames” and hardware manufacturers’ instructions. B. Install materials and systems in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and approved submittals. Install materials and systems in proper relation with adjacent construction and with uniform appearance. Provide all components, accessories, shims, spacers, blocking, fasteners, and miscellaneous accessories necessary for a fully functional, complete, and final installation. 08700 - 1 Children of America CITY, STATE Issue Date 08.10.10 Version 2.00 FINISH HARDWARE C. Adjust operation of all doors, hardware, hinges, closers, and seals. Door locksets shall operate easily and smoothly and shall retract locking mechanism without excessive force or effort. Door cylinder and bolts shall be in exact alignment with strikes and receivers. D. Set all door thresholds in a full bed of asphalt mastic, or SBS modified bitumen, or 60 mil butyl sealer gasket. Cut and insert all thresholds so that flat surface of threshold, aligns with door bottom seal. Use only thermal-break type thresholds. Maximum height of threshold to be 1/2 inch. Install thresholds in lengths necessary to scribe cut and fit tight to metal door frame profile. 3.02 A. KEYING Master Keying Plan: Contractor to provide locksets equipped with temporary construction cores. When building is ready for occupancy, Contractor shall make arrangements for hardware supplier to meet with the Franchisee to develop a keying strategy. MPM Distribution shall deliver permanent lock cores directly to the Franchisee Franchisee shall pull out all construction cores, and install the permanent cores. The Contractor’s responsibility for interior building security ends with the installation of the permanent lock cores. 1. Key doors for the following categories: AA Master 1AA Exterior Vestibule Door and Exterior Corridor Door 2AA Remaining Exterior Doors except Mechanical Room 3AA Interior Doors and Mechanical Room 08700 - 2 Children of America CITY, STATE Issue Date 08.10.10 Version 2.00 FINISH HARDWARE SECTION 08810 - GLASS AND GLAZING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Provide glass and glazing for all applications scheduled. B. Glass schedule: (TG= Tempered Glass; TIG=Tempered Insulated Glass) 1. TG Interior Metal Framed Glass: 1/4" thick clear glass, safety tempered. 2. TIG Exterior Metal Framed Glass Sidelights: 1/4" thick clear glass, safety tempered. 3. TG Interior Hollow Metal Door Glass: 1/4" thick clear glass, safety tempered. 4. TIG Exterior Hollow Metal Door Glass: Insulated and safety tempered 5. TIG Clad Wood Windows: Insulated and safety tempered 6. TG Mirrors: 1/4" plate glass, safety tempered. 1.02 A. 1.03 A. SUBMITTALS Submit for approval samples, shop drawings, product data, mock-ups, warranty, test reports. QUALITY ASSURANCE Comply with governing codes and regulations. Provide products of acceptable manufacturers which have been in satisfactory use in similar service for three years. Use experienced installers. Deliver, handle, and store materials in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Glazing sheets: 1. Primary clear float glass, ASTM C1036 2. All insulating glass shall conform to ASTM E7774 level A. 3. All glazing, fire safety glass, and mirrors shall be safety glazing conforming to both ANSI Z97.1-1975 (100 ft/lb) and CPSC-16 CFR 1201.(Cat II) (400 ft/lb) 4. TG - Tempered glazing shall conform to ASTM C1048, FT (Fully Tempered) Condition A (uncoated) Type I (Transparent Glass, Flat), Class 1 (Clear), Quality q3 (Glazing Select). 5. TIG - Tempered insulated glazing shall conform to ASTM C1048, FT (Fully Tempered) Condition A (uncoated) Type I (Transparent Glass, Flat), Class 1 (Clear), Quality q3 (Glazing Select). 6. Mirrors, silvering, copper coating, protective organic coating. 7. Safety glazing panels shall each bear an etched label indicating the safety performance, agency compliance, and type of panel. B. Insulating glass units: Sealed insulating units fabricated from two panes of glass with air space between, dual sealing system, spacer, desiccant, and corner reinforcement. Glass thicknesses and heat strengthening to be determined by manufacturer for wind loading conditions. Insulating glass warranty: 10 years. C. Glazing materials: 08810 - 1 Children of America CITY, STATE Issue Date 08.10.10 Version 2.0 GLASS & GLAZING 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Silicone glazing sealants. a) Structural sealant: Dow Corning 795 or approved equal. b) Weather seal: Dow Corning or approved equal. Acrylic glazing sealant (interior); Tremco Mono or approved equal. Preformed glazing tape; Tremco Polyshim Tape or approved equal. Glazing gaskets: a) Lock-strip gaskets; D.S. Brown Co or approved equal. b) Preformed gaskets; Tremco or approved equal. Setting blocks, shims and spacers as required. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Inspect framing and report unsatisfactory conditions in writing. B. Comply with FGMA “Glazing Manual” and manufacturers instructions and recommendations. Use manufacturer’s recommended spacers, blocks, primers, sealers, gaskets and accessories. C. Install glass with uniformity of pattern, draw, bow and roller marks. D. Install sealants to provide complete wetting and bond and to create a substantial wash away from glass. E. Set mirrors on stainless steel clips and brackets provided by manufacturer. F. Remove and replace damaged glass and glazing. Wash, polish and protect all glass supplied under this section. 3.02 A. INSPECTION Installed glazing without safety tempered etching or approved identification labeling shall be considered to be non-safety tempered and shall be removed and replaced with properly labeled safety tempered glazing at no additional cost to the Owner or Children of America. END OF SECTION 08810 - 2 Children of America CITY, STATE Issue Date 08.10.10 Version 2.0 GLASS & GLAZING SECTION 09250 - GYPSUM DRYWALL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. 1. Provide gypsum drywall work including metal support systems: Interior walls, partitions, and ceilings. 2. Special treatment with WR gypsum board at wet areas 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with governing codes and regulations. Provide products of acceptable manufacturers which have been in satisfactory use in similar service for three years. Use experienced installers. Deliver, handle, and store materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Tolerances: Not more than 1/16" difference in true plane at joints between adjacent boards before finishing. After finishing, joints shall be not be visible. Not more than 1/8" in 10' deviation from true plane, plumb, level and proper relation to adjacent surfaces in finished work. Not more than a 1/4” gap between floor slab and Gypsum drywall. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Gypsum board: All gypsum wallboard products shall comply with ASTM C 1396 and as follows: 1. WALLS: Interior Dry Area Use: ASTM C 36, 5/8" thick gypsum wallboard; U. S. Gypsum, Gold Bond Div. National Gypsum, 2. WALLS: Interior Wet Area Use; Drinking Fountain and Toilet Wainscot (Tile) Backing: ASTM C 630, Type 'X', 5/8" thick 'WR' gypsum backing board, fire resistant and water resistant; U. S. Gypsum, Gold Bond Div. National Gypsum, 3. CEILINGS: Applied to underside of manufactured roof trusses and furred ceilings: Use: ASTM C 36, Type 'X', 5/8" thick gypsum wallboard, fire resistant; U. S. Gypsum, Gold Bond Div. National Gypsum. (Used only with plenum return.) B. Fasteners: ASTM C 954 and ASTM C 1002. Provide 1-1/8 inch long, Type S-12 bugle head screws at interior areas. Provide additional anchors and fasteners as required. C. Ceiling suspension and furring materials: Steel runners and galvanized hanger wire. D. Joint reinforcement: ASTM C 587 paper or fiberglass tape and ready-mixed vinyl compound. E. Accessories: Bullnose corner bead, casing beads, control joints; U. S. Gypsum 800 series as applicable. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION 09250 - 1 Children of America CITY, STATE Issue Date 08.10.10 GYPSUM DRYWALL Version 2.00 A. Extend all loadbearing and non-loadbearing partitions to the underside of manufactured roof trusses, and apply gypsum wallboard full height. B. Install boards vertically. Do not allow butt-to-butt joints and joints that do not fall over framing members. C. Install WR drywall (greenboard) described above, as follows: 1. All toilet room walls, three (3) walls adjacent to drinking fountain alcoves and all walls adjacent to classroom handwashing sinks, apply water resistant drywall from the floor to a height of 4 feet above the floor. 2. In Laundry, Pantry and Mechanical room, apply water resistant drywall for full height and on ceilings. D. Provide insulation full height and thickness in partitions at toilet rooms, between classrooms, in office walls, and in kitchen walls. E. Provide acoustical sealant at both faces at top and bottom runner tracks, wall perimeters, openings, expansion and control joints. 3.02 FINISH A. Comply with ASTM C 840 Standard Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board; GA 214 Recommended Levels of Gypsum Board Finish; and GA 2162000 Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board; B. Provide gypsum wallboard minimum finish levels meeting the criteria established in GA 214 as follows: 1. LEVEL 1 Wallboard applied to the underside of roof trusses and concealed from view by lay-in suspended ceiling system 2. LEVEL 2 Walls behind FRP covering in Laundry, toilet rooms, and Kitchen. Walls behind wall carpet. Ceiling in Mechanical Room 3. LEVEL 4 Interior walls for all Classrooms, Offices, Toilet Rooms, Corridor bulkheads and attic stair ceiling bulkhead. Closets, and Staff Room 4. LEVEL 5 Gypsum wallboard installed in City Place. END OF SECTION 09250 - 2 Children of America CITY, STATE I ssue Date 08.10.10 GYPSUM Version 2.00 DRYWALL SECTION 09510 - ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Provide acoustical ceilings, trim and metal suspension system. 1.02 SUBMITTAL A. Submit for approval samples, product data, extra stock. 1.03 QUALITY A. S ASSURANCE Comply with governing codes and regulations. Provide products of acceptable manufacturers which have been in satisfactory use in similar service for three years. Use experienced installers. Deliver, handle, and store materials in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. AT-1 Acoustical Ceiling Panels in Dry Areas: 5/8" thick, wet-formed mineral fiber, nondirectional texture mineral tile; with HumiGuard Plus treatment to inhibit panel sag; 10year warranty; Fire Class A, ASTM E 1264, Type III, Form 2, Pattern USG RADAR #2115 1. Panel size: 24" by 24". Color White. 2. Panel edge: Square edge; flush mount with grid. B. AT-2 Acoustical Ceiling Panels in Dry Areas: 5/8" thick, wet-formed mineral fiber, nondirectional texture mineral tile; with HumiGuard Plus treatment to inhibit panel sag; 10year warranty; Fire Class A, ASTM E 1264, Type III, Form 2, Pattern USG RADAR #2315 1. Panel size: 24" by 48". Color White. 2. Panel edge: Square edge; flush mount with grid. C. AT-3 High Performance Non-Perforated Ceiling Panels in Wet Areas (See Finish Schedule on Drawings): No. 870, wet-formed mineral fiber, vinyl-faced membrane; with HumiGuard Plus treatment to inhibit panel sag; 10-year warranty; washable scrubbable, soil-resistant finish; USDA Approval; Clean Room Class 1000 Rating; Fire Class A, ASTM 1264, Type IV, Form 2, Pattern USG Vinyl coated Clima PLus #3270 color White. Nonperforated. 1. Panel size: 24" by 48". 2. Panel edge: Square edge; flush mount with grid C. Exposed grid suspension system: ASTM C 635, intermediate duty painted steel, white color; Armstrong,. 1. 15/16 inch, exposed tee grid system 2. Use USG JH15 1"Radius outside corner cap on all outside corners. PART 3 - EXECUTION 09510 - 1 Children of America CITY, STATE I ssue Date 08.10.10 ACOUSTICA Version 2.0 L CEILINGS 3.01 INSTALLATI ON A. Install materials and suspension systems in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations, and ASTM C636. Coordinate installation with location of mechanical and electrical work to ensure proper locations. B. Level ceiling to within 1/8" in 10' in both directions. Scribe and cut panels to fit accurately. Measure and layout to avoid less than half panel units. C. Provide full edge support for all panel edges. D. Removal and reinstallation at existing ceilings: Remove and store materials for reuse. Handle with white gloves and avoid damaging corners and edges. Clean tiles and grid system which have been removed. Provide additional materials to complete the work and to replace damaged existing materials. New materials shall exactly match existing materials as approved. E. Adjust, clean, and touch-up all system components. F. Provide wrapped and labeled maintenance stock of new material equal to five percent (5%) of each installed type of acoustic ceiling tile and suspension track members. G. Provide panel hold-down clips to prevent uplift at all vestibules and hallways near exit doors. END OF SECTION 09510 - 2 Children of America CITY, STATE I ssue Date 08.10.10 ACOUSTICA Version 2.0 L CEILINGS SECTION 09650 - RESILIENT FLOORING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 A. B. C. D. 1.02 A. 1.03 A. SUMMARY Provide resilient flooring. Provide wall base. Provide adaptors, binders, cove caps, and other accessories as required. Adhesives, glues, solvents, and other compounds required for installation. SUBMITTALS Submit for approval samples, product data, extra stock. Include Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) with material submittals QUALITY ASSURANCE Comply with governing codes and regulations. Provide products of acceptable manufacturers which have been in satisfactory use in similar service for three years. Use experienced installers. Deliver, handle, and store materials in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 A. STANDARD MATERIALS Tile Flooring: 1. Accent Tiles: Vinyl composition tile (VT): 12" by 12" by 1/8"; ASTM F 1066, Class 2; Congoleum Commercial. a. VCT-1: Alternatives series #AL-96 Cobalt Blue b. VCT-2: Alternatives series #AL-60 Orange Glow c. VCT-3: Alternatives series #AL-01 Plum 2. Field Tiles: Vinyl composition tile (VT): 12" by 12" by 1/8"; ASTM F 1066, Class 2; Congoleum Commercial. a. VCT-4: Alternatives series #AL-11 Pearl White B. Accessories: 1. Vinyl Wall base For Carpet: ASTM F 1861-98, Type TP and TV; Group I a Size: 4-1/2" high, 4-1/4" face surface, 1/4" thick tapered wedge b. Style: Johnsonite vinyl cove base d. Color: Tropical Storm 14 (see A7.2 for City Place finish) c. Adhesive: Johnsonite #960 Wall Base Adhesive. 2. Vinyl Wall base For Resilient Flooring: ASTM F 1861-98, Type TV; Group I a Size: 4-1/2" high, 4-1/4" face surface, 1/4" thick tapered wedge b. Style: Johnsonite vinyl cove base d. Color: Tropical Storm 14 (see A7.2 for City Place finish) c. Adhesive: Johnsonite #960 Wall Base Adhesive. 3. Vinyl Adaptor Carpet-to-Resilient: a Size: 1/4" carpet to 1/8" resilient flooring b. Style: Johnsonite Type CTA-XX-A c. Adhesive: Johnsonite #945 Contact Bond Adhesive. 09650 - 1 Children of America CITY, STATE Issue Date 08.10.10 Version 2.0 RESILIENT FLOORING 4. D. Wall Carpet Cove Cap a. Manufacturer: Roppe b. Style: Rubber Cove Cap #28 c. Color: Black d. Adhesive: Contact Bond Adhesive with staples Adhesives: 1. Manufacturer’s recommended adhesives with low VOC. Provide MSDS documentation with submittals PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION B. Comply with manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations. Install in proper relation to adjacent work. C. Prepare surfaces by cleaning, leveling and priming as required. Test adhesive for bond before general installation. Level to 1/8" in 10' tolerance. D. Tile flooring: Match tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in the same sequence as manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. Discard broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed tiles 1. Install tile with tight joints 2. Orient each tile with grain direction alternating (90 degrees) to adjacent tiles. 3. Layout to prevent less than 1/2 tile units. F. Install base and accessories to minimize joints. Install base with joints as far from corners as practical. G. Install transition strips between Carpet and VT; and between Sealed Concrete and VT.. Use transition strips if necessary to separate changes in VT tile coursing at door sills. H. After installation, installer shall clean, wax and buff all resilient flooring in accordance with Children of America’s instructions for initial cleaning, waxing, and buffing, and Section 01700 prior to final acceptance. END OF SECTION 09650 - 2 Children of America CITY, STATE Issue Date 08.10.10 Version 2.0 RESILIENT FLOORING SECTION 09680 - CARPET PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 A. 1.02 A. 1.03 SUMMARY Provide carpeting: for glued-down installation. SUBMITTALS Submit for approval samples, product data, warranty, maintenance data, extra stock, proposed seaming layout. Include Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) with material submittals. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with governing codes and regulations. Use experienced installers. Deliver, handle, and store materials in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. B. Before installation check with the carpet manufacturer for any updates or changes in the installation procedure. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 A. MATERIALS Floor Carpet: 1. 2. 3. J+J Invision Style: PCA01 Color: 982454476-01 Children of America Product a. Construction - Patterned loop b. Backing-PremierBac Plus c. Dye Method-Solution/Yarn dyed d. Fiber Type-Encore SD Ultima (with recycled content) e. Face Weight-22oz./sy 74.59grams/m2 f. Pile Density-7864 oz./sy 259.56kg/m3 g. Pattern Repeat-.800”(w)x1.260”(1) approx. 2.03 cm x 3.2 cm h. Gauge- 1/10 3.94 rows/cm i. Stitches- 12.6 stitches/in 4.96 stitches/cm j. Standard Width- 12 ft. 3.66m B. Wall Carpet: all walls 40” high at corridor walls, 36" high at all other areas except bathrooms and where indicated on interior elevations. 1. Style: PCA02 3. Color: 982457788-Children of America 4. Width of roll: 54” Adhesive: Gibbson Homans, SHUR-STIK 111 or Roman Adhesive Pro 838 09680 - 1 Children of America CITY, STATE Issue Date 07.15.11 Version 1.00 CARPET C. Wall Carpet Cove Cap: at all wall carpet 1. Manufacturer: Roppe 2. Style: #28 Carpet Cap 3. Color: Black Adhesive: Johnsonite #945 Contact Bond Adhesive and staples D. Floor Carpet Mounting: 1. Direct glue down: Waterproof, strippable adhesive, Use low VOC adhesives only. Provide MSDS documentation with submittals PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 FLOOR CARPET INSTALLATION A. Comply with recommendations of Carpet and Rug Institute “Specifier’s Handbook”. B. Prepare surfaces and install materials in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and approved submittals. Clean, patch, and level substrate. Install materials in proper relation with adjacent construction and with uniform appearance. Coordinate with work of other sections. C. Install edge guards and reducer strips as required; clean and protect. 3.02 WALL CARPET INSTALLATION A. Preparation: 1) Remove all wall plates, obstructions and old wall covering. 2) Clean, seal and prime wall before application, especially gloss y and semi-gloss paint, wood or concrete walls. 3) Seal markings that cannot be removed by cleaning to prevent “bleedthru”. 4) Carefully inspect all material before installation. 5) Ensure pattern and color is satisfactor y and meet specification. B. Adhesive Application: 1) Recommendations of adhesive manufacturer s hould be strictly followed and take precedence. 2) Apply premixed, undiluted, heavy-duty, clear wall covering adhesive to the wall—NOT THE FABRIC. 3) Allow adhesive to become tack y, not dr y. 4) A clear, non-staining adhesive will help prevent problems if dropped on the face of the material. 5) Care should be taken not to get adhesive on the face. If necessar y, check with adhesive manufacturer. 6) If adhesive lands on the face of the material, check with adhesive manufacturer. C. Adhesive: 1) Shur-stik 111 Gibson-Homans, T winsburg,OH 2) Pro 838 Roman Adhesives, Calumet,IL 09680 - 2 Children of America CITY, STATE Issue Date 07.15.11 Version 1.00 CARPET D. Installation: 1) For best results, install rolls in numerical sequence by dye lot. 2) Cut material to desired lengths; allow minimum 2” on the top and bottom for trimming. 3) After cutting, installer or distributor assumes all responsibility. 4) Acoustical wall coverings have a knap. Check every roll and cut for knap direction prior to installation. DO NOT ASSUME KNAP DIRECTION IS THE SAME ON ALL ROLLS. DO NOT REVERSE STRIPS, they may appear as a different color or shade. 5) Install 3 strips in sequence with knap in same direction. 6) Inspect for color, pattern, uniformity and application. If acceptable, proceed with work. 7) Continue to inspect in 3 strip intervals. If unacceptable—STOP WORK IMMEDIATELY. Contact your local representative. 8) All edges are trimmed to a rib, butt seamed and steel rolled – DO NOT DOUBLE CUT. 9) This product is not precision trimmed. Trim the goods on a table in the same “groove”. Use a straight edge to insure an accurate cut. 10) To insure a good, clean trim, a new blade should be used on each strip. 3.03 CARPET COVE CAP INSTALLATION A. The installation of Roppe Carpet Cap should not begin until the work of all other trades has been completed, especially overhead trades. B. Areas to receive carpet cap moldings shall be clean, fully enclosed, weather tight, and maintained at a uniform temperature of at least 70 degrees F for 24 hours before, during, and after the installation is completed. C. The carpet cap moldings and adhesives shall be conditioned in the same manner. D. The wall surface shall be smooth, flat, permanently dry, clean and free of all foreign material, such as dust, paint, grease, oils, solvents, curing and hardening compounds, sealers, asphalt, and old adhesive residue. E. Do not install on exterior surfaces subject to weather. F. Carpet Cap Moldings shall be securely adhered to the wall utilizing the manufacturer's recommended adhesive and staples G. Carpet Cap Moldings shall be rolled, with a J-hand roller, after installation, to ensure proper bonding. END OF SECTION 09680 - 3 Children of America CITY, STATE Issue Date 07.15.11 Version 1.00 CARPET SECTION 09900 – PAINTING & COATINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 A. 1.03 A. SUMMARY Provide surface preparation and painting for all unfinished interior and exterior surfaces, including electrical and mechanical equipment with shop primed surface QUALITY ASSURANCE Comply with governing codes and regulations. Provide products of acceptable manufacturers which have been in satisfactory use in similar service for three years. Use experienced installers. Deliver, handle, and store materials in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 A. MATERIALS Manufacturer: Sherwin-Williams “Durations” B. Exterior paint systems: 1. Concrete masonry units: Block filler, 1 coat; acrylic latex (flat finish), 2 coats. 2. Wood for opaque finish: Solvent-based (SB) alkyd primer, MDF 3.0 mills, 1 coat; Each finish coat SB alkyd enamel (gloss finish), MDF 3.0 mils per coat, 2 coats. 3. Wood for semi-transparent finish: SB semi-transparent stain (flat appearing finish), 2 coats. 4. Ferrous metal: Semi-gloss, WB alkyd primer, 1 coat MDF 3.0 mils; Each finish coat WB acrylic enamel (gloss finish), MDF 3.0 mils per coat, 2 coats. 5. Galvanized metal: Semi-gloss, WB alkyd primer, 1 coat MDF 3.0 mils; Each finish coat WB acrylic enamel (gloss finish), MDF 3.0 mils per coat, 2 coats. C. Interior wall paint: 1. Drywall: WB latex primer, MDF 1.1 mils, 1 coat; Each finish coat, WB interior latex (eggshell finish), MDF 1.6 mils per coat, 2 coats. a. Primer: PrepRite 200, Interior Latex Primer B28W200 b. PT-1: Children of America Blue, Knockdown finish on walls. c. PT-2: Children of America Orange, Knockdown finish on walls. d. PT-3: Children of America Purple, Knockdown finish on walls. e. PT-4: Children of America Ultra White, Knockdown finish on walls. f. PT-5: Children of America Light Blue, Smooth finish. g. PT-6: Sherwin Williams, color 'Sand Dollar' SW 6099, Knockdown finish on wall. h. PT-7: Children of America, City Place- Color Blue Bell #6793 Smooth Finish 09900 - 1 Children of America CITY, STATE Issue Date 09.26.11 Version 1.00 PAINTING & COATINGS PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION B. Inspect surfaces, report unsatisfactory conditions in writing; beginning work means acceptance of substrate. C. Comply with manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations for preparation, priming and coating work. Coordinate with work of other sections. D. Paint all unpainted metal, plastic, wood, or other unpainted items that penetrate roof or exterior walls, or that are otherwise visible from the ground. Color to match background unless otherwise directed by Architect. E. Minimum Dry Film Thickness (MDF) shall be maintained and verified in accordance with SSPC, PA-2 standards. F. Surface preparation, when noted on painting schedule or on drawings, shall comply with Surface Preparation Standards by SSPC as follows: 1. SP-1 Solvent preparation 2. SP-2 Hand tool preparation 3. SP-3 Power tool preparation 4. SP-6/10 Abrasive blast preparation 5. SP-12 Water cleaning, power washing 6. SP-13 Abrading and/or scarifying surfaces G. In the absence of surface preparation standards shown on painting schedule or on drawings, the minimum surface preparation for any paint application shall comply with SP-2. H. Match approved mock-ups for color, texture, and pattern. Re-coat or remove and replace work which does not match or shows loss of adhesion. Clean up, touch up and protect work. END OF SECTION 09900 - 2 Children of America CITY, STATE Issue Date 09.26.11 Version 1.00 PAINTING & COATINGS SECTION 09986 SANITARY WALL FINISHES PART 1 1.01 A. 1.02 A. GENERAL SUMMARY Section Includes: 1. Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic (FRP) wall panels. 2. Adhesives. 3. Fasteners. 4. Accessories 5. Finishing SUBMITTALS: Submit product data, samples, and manufacturer’s installation guide PART 2: 2.01 A. 2.02 PRODUCTS MANUFACTURERS Provide FRP panels from one of the following acceptable manufactures: 1. Fire-X Glasbord-P, manufactured by Kemlite Company; Joilet, Illinois; 1-800-4350080 2. Glasteel, manufactured by Division of Stability America, Inc.; 830 Highway 57E; Collierville, TN 38017; 1-800-238-5546. 3. LascoBoard, manufactured by Lasco Panel Products.; 8015 Dixon Drive; Florence, KY 41042; 1-800-626-1220. MATERIALS A. Provide FRP panels with the following minimum characteristics: 1. Color: Bright White 2. Thickness: 0.09 inches (2.3 mm) 3. Surface: embossed 4. Backing: bondable surface 5. Fire Rating: Class A surface material, U.L. Listed 6. Flame Spread: less than 25 7. Smoke Development: less than 450 8. Scratch Resistance: Barcol Hardness rating 12 (ASTM D2583) 9. Impact Strength: ASTM D3029; 22 in-lb B. Provide adhesives as recommended by manufacturers. C. Provide moldings and fasteners as recommended and supplied by manufacturer. PART 3 3.01 A. EXECUTION PREPARATION Installation of materials shall be conditioned at room temperature for 48 hours prior to installation. 09986 - 1 Children of America CITY, STATE Issue Date 08.10.10 Version 2.0 SANITARY WALL FINISHES B. 3.02 Substrate shall be clean, dry, smooth and free from any loose debris, cracks, holes or depressions. Such imperfections shall be filled, sanded or otherwise made smooth before installation. INSTALLATION A. Install panels where designated on the Drawings and in the Finish Schedule. B. Panels shall be installed following manufacturers instructions. C. Panels shall be fully adhered to wall surface, without warps, bows, or other loose or distorted areas. D. Moldings shall be installed with smooth joints, without warping, twisting, or otherwise damaged. END OF SECTION 09986 - 2 Children of America CITY, STATE Issue Date 08.10.10 Version 2.0 SANITARY WALL FINISHES SECTION 10522 - FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND CABINETS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Provide portable fire extinguishers B. Provide semi-recessed cabinets for portable fire extinguishers 1.02 A. 1.03 SUBMITTALS Submit for approval shop drawings, product data. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with governing codes and regulations. Use experienced installers. Deliver, handle, and store materials in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. B. Comply with local Fire Marshall requirements for number and location of fire extinguishers. Provide all extinguishers required at no additional cost to the Owner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Fire extinguishers: UL listed and labeled units; J. L. Industries or approved equal: 1. J.L. Industries Cosmic 10E, Type ABC, Multi-purpose dry chemical type, 10 pound. B. Cabinets: Enameled steel box with trim, frame, door, and accessories; J. L. Industries or approved equal. Noted as 'FEC' on Drawings 1. J.L. Industries Ambassador 1017 semi-recessed 2. Door Style: F – full glass door w/pull handle 2. Door Glazing: 10 – Clear Acrylic C. Hangers: Extinguisher manufacturer's standard surface mounted wall hanging bracket and accessories. Noted as 'HFE' on Drawings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install at locations and heights indicated and acceptable to authorities. B. Install cabinets plumb and level. C. Install materials and systems in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and approved submittals. Install materials and systems in proper relation with adjacent construction and with uniform appearance. Coordinate with work of other sections. D. Restore damaged finishes and test for proper operation. Clean and protect work from damage. END OF SECTION 10522 - 1 Children of America CITY, STATE Issue Date 08.10.10 Version 2.0 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS & CABINETS SECTION 10800 - TOILET ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 A. SUMMARY Provide toilet accessories where shown on drawings. 1.02 A. QUALITY ASSURANCE Comply with governing codes and regulations. Use experienced installers. Deliver, handle, and store materials in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Units: Stainless steel fabrications; ASI – American Specialties, Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. or Bradley as noted below. B. Types, quantities, and locations shown on Drawings 2.02 ACCESSORY SCHEDULE A. AC-1 – Adult ADA Grab Bars 1. Model Number: a. Bobrick B-6806 b. One 36” horizontal, one 42” horizontal, and one 18” vertical grab bar, a total of three grab bars needed for each restroom. 2. Description: 1-1/4 to 1-1/2 inch outside diameter (OD), 18 gauge stainless steel. snap-on concealed mounting and anchorage. No. 4 satin finish. Minimum 900 pound supporting capacity. 1-1/2 inch wall clearance. See drawings for mounting height. B. AC-2 - Angle Frame Mirror 1. Model Numbers: a. American Specialties: 0600. b. Bobrick: B290 - 1830. c. Bradley: 780. 2. Description: 18 inches wide x 30 inches high. 1/2" x 1/2" x 1/2" flat channel frame. Minimum 20 gauge stainless steel, all joints mitered, welded and ground smooth. Type 430 bright polished finish. Galvanized steel back with slots for mounting screws and integral screw-head lock. Back protected by shockabsorbing water-resistant padding. 1/4 inch polished tempered glass mirror. C. AC-3 - Fixed Tilt Mirror 1. Model Numbers: a. American Specialties: 0535 b. Bobrick: B293 – 1830 c. Bradley: 740 Description: 18 inches wide x 30 inches high. Minimum 20 gauge stainless steel, All joints mitered, welded and ground smooth. Type 430 bright polished finish. : 10800 - 1 Children of America CITY, STATE Issue Date 08.10.10 Version 2.0 TOILET ACCESSORIES PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install materials and systems in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and approved submittals. Install materials and systems in proper relation with adjacent construction and with uniform appearance. Coordinate with work of other sections. B. Install equipment at heights and locations shown on drawings and as otherwise directed by Americans With Disabilities Act and Indiana Accessibility Code relating to child care facilities. C. Coordinate with framing contractor to locate solid wood blocking at required locations. D. Restore damaged finishes and test for proper operation. Clean and protect work from damage. END OF SECTION 10800 - 2 Children of America CITY, STATE Issue Date 08.10.10 Version 2.0 TOILET ACCESSORIES SECTION 11050 – FF&E PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY As part of the turnkey construction project, supply an allowance of $100,000 for all FF&E items. These items include the following: School supplies Computers Tables and chairs Toys/Books/Games Cribs and mattresses 1.02 SUBMITTALS At 70% of construction completion, a check for the $100,000 allowance will be submitted to Children of America. COA will then place all necessary orders, to be delivered upon completion of the building’s certificate of occupancy. The check will be mailed to the following address: Children of America c/o Joe Letzelter 5300 W Atlantic Ave Suite 700 Delray Beach, FL 33484 Please note the following list of items that are not included in the FF&E, and should be included in the construction scope of the project: All Casework – this includes all cabinets, countertops, bookcases and cubbies. All appliances – this includes all pantry/kitchen/lounge/infant room appliances All CCTV equipment – this includes all cameras, electronics, installation and flat panel television. All playground equipment – this includes equipment, turf, installation and fencing. All window treatments All signage – this includes interior and exterior END OF SECTION SECTION 11050 – FF&E 11050 - 1 Children of America CITY, STATE Issue Date 04.07.08 Version 1.00 FF&E SECTION 12500 - WINDOW TREATMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Provide horizontal mini-blinds on all exterior windows, interior vision panels and doors with 24”x30” vision panels. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit for approval samples, color selection choices, shop drawings, product data, mock-ups, warranty, extra stock. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with governing codes and regulations. Provide products of acceptable manufacturers which have been in satisfactory use in similar service for three years. Use experienced installers. Deliver, handle, and store materials in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Hunter Douglas, Inc.; NO EXCEPTIONS a. Décor Series, Lite-rise feature horizontal mini-blinds, 1-inch slat width; 8 gauge aluminum. b. Wand operator: Detachable clear plastic wand, of proper length to suit blind installation, detachable without tools by raising locking sleeve. c. Color: Bright White. Not to exceed 36" width. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Take field measurements prior to fabrication to ensure fit. B. Install blinds on exterior windows, interior classroom view windows(corridor side), interior doors with 24”x30” vision panel. C. Blinds installed at Office, Lounge and Pantry to be on interior side of window. D. Provide hold-down clips for blinds mounted on door windows. D. Install materials and systems in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and approved submittals. Install materials and systems in proper relation with adjacent construction and with uniform appearance. Coordinate with work of other sections. E. Restore damaged finishes and test for proper operation. Clean and protect work from damage. END OF SECTION 12500 - 1 Children of America Issue Date 02.10.05 WINDOW TREATMENT CITY, STATE Version 5.00 SECTION 13851 - FIRE ALARM SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 A. 1.02 SUMMARY Provide complete automatic fire alarm system including: 1. Initiating devices. 2. Notification appliances and devices. 3. Control panel. 4. Remote station signal transmitter. 5. Inspection, Testing and Certification SUBMITTALS A. Submit for review samples, shop drawings, product data, warranty, maintenance data. B. Submit written testing certification reports as described herein. 1.03 REFERENCES A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): 1. ANSI S3.41, 1990 - Audible Emergency Evacuation Signals. B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 1. NFPA 13, 2007 Edition - Installation of Sprinkler Systems. 3. NFPA 70, 2008 Edition - National Electrical Code. 4. NFPA 72, 2007 Edition - National Fire Alarm Code. 5. NFPA 101, 2009 Edition - Life Safety Code. C. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.(UL): 1. UL Fire Protection Directory, 2009 Edition. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with governing codes and regulations. Provide products of acceptable manufacturers which have been in satisfactory use in similar service for three years. Use experienced installers. Deliver, handle, and store materials in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. B. Provide and install complete fire alarm system and detection system per NFPA 72, , and requirements of state and local fire officials. Provide smoke detection devices at locations to comply with NFPA 72, and not to exceed 30 feet on center or as otherwise required by NFPA 72 and local rules and regulations. C. Coordinate alarm wiring with automatic sprinkler system per NFPA 13, the Building Code and requirements of state and local fire officials. D. Provide and install all detection systems per NFPA 70, NFPA 13, the Building Code and requirements of state and local fire officials. 1.05 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 13851 - 1 Children of America CITY, STATE Issue Date 08.10.10 Version 2.0 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM A. Protected Premises Fire Alarm System: NFPA 72, manual and automatic local fire alarm system with dial-out connections to third party remote monitoring stations of the Owner’s choice. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 A. 2.02 MANUFACTURERS Subject to compliance with project requirements, manufacturers offering Products which may be incorporated in the Work include the following: 1. Cerberus Pyrotronics, Florham Park, NJ (973) 593-2600. 2. Edwards Systems Technology, Cheshire, CT (203) 699-3000. 3. Faraday LLC, Tecumseh, MI (517) 423-2111. 4. Gamewell Worldwide, Ashland, MA (508) 231-1400, (888) 347-3269. 5. Honeywell Incorporated, Minneapolis, MN (800) 328-5111. 6. Notifier Fire Systems, Northford, CT (203) 484-7161. 7. Radionics, Salinas, CA (800) 538-5807. 8. Simplex, Westminster, MA (978) 731-2500 (800) SIMPLEX. PROTECTED PREMISES FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL A. Control Panel: Modular construction with flush wall-mounted enclosure. B. Power supply: Adequate to serve control panel modules, remote detectors door holders, smoke dampers, relays, and alarm signaling devices. Include battery-operated emergency power supply with capacity for operating system in standby mode for 24 hours followed by alarm mode for 10 minutes. C. System Supervision: Component or power supply failure places system in trouble mode. D. Initiating Device Circuits: Supervised zone with alarm and trouble indication; occurrence of single ground or open condition places circuit in trouble mode but does not disable that circuit from initiating an alarm. E. Indicating Appliance Circuits: Supervised ANSI S3.41 signal module, sufficient for signal devices connected to system; occurrence of single ground or open condition places circuit in trouble mode but does not disable that circuit from signaling an alarm. Visual appliance circuits shall provide for synchronization of flashing. F. Remote Station Signal Transmitter: Electrically supervised digital alarm communicator transmitter capable of transmitting alarm and trouble signals over telephone lines to central station receiver. G. Auxiliary Relays: Provide sufficient SPDT auxiliary relay contacts for each detection zone to provide accessory functions specified. H. Provide TROUBLE ACKNOWLEDGE, DRILL, and ALARM SILENCE switch. I. Trouble Sequence of Operation: System or circuit trouble places system in trouble mode, which causes the following system operations: 1. Visual and audible trouble alarm indicated at fire alarm control panel. 2. Visual and audible trouble alarm indicated at remote annunciator panel. 3. Trouble signal transmitted to remote station. 13851 - 2 Children of America CITY, STATE Issue Date 08.10.10 Version 2.0 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 4. Manual acknowledge function at fire alarm control panel silences audible trouble alarm; visual alarm is displayed until initiating failure or circuit trouble is cleared. J. Alarm Sequence of Operation: Actuation of initiating device places circuit in alarm mode, which causes the following system operations: 1. Sound and display local fire alarm signaling devices with ANSI S3.41signal. 2. Transmit non-coded signal to remote station equipment 3. Indicate location of alarm zone on fire alarm control panel and on remote annunciator panel. 4. Transmit signal to building mechanical systems to initiate shutdown of fans and damper operation. 5. Transmit signal to release door hold-open devices. K. Alarm Reset: System remains in alarm mode until manually reset with key-accessible reset function; system resets only if initiating circuits are out of alarm mode. L. Lamp Test: Manual lamp test function causes alarm indication at each zone at fire alarm control panel. M. Drill Sequence of Operation: Manual drill function causes alarm mode operation as described above. N. Zoning: As indicated on drawings 2.03 INITIATING DEVICES A. Manual Pull Station: Semi-recessed mounted, non-coded type, single action manual station. Provide manufacturer's standard backbox. All pull stations must have protective covers. B. Spot Heat Detector: Combination rate-of-rise and fixed temperature, rated 135 degrees F (57 degrees C) and temperature rate of rise of 15 degrees F (8.3 degrees C) C. Ceiling Mounted Smoke Detector: NFPA 72, ionization type with adjustable sensitivity, plug-in base, integral thermal element rated 135 degrees F (57 degrees C), and visual indication of detector actuation, integral test button, suitable for mounting on 4 inch outlet box. Provide two-wire detector with common power supply and signal circuits. D. Duct Mounted Smoke Detector: NFPA 72, photoelectric type with auxiliary SPDT relay contact for addressable remote relay control key-operated NORMAL-RESET-TEST switch, duct sampling tubes extending width of duct, and visual indication of detector actuation, in duct-mounted housing. Provide two-wire detector with common power supply and signal circuits. E. Flame Detector: NFPA 72, ultraviolet or infrared radiation type. F. Suppression System flow activation and tamper switches. 2.04 A. SIGNALING APPLIANCES Alarm Bells: NFPA 72, electric vibrating, 10 inch bell with operating mechanism behind dome. Sound Rating: minimum 81 dB at 10 feet for exterior installation. 13851 - 3 Children of America CITY, STATE Issue Date 08.10.10 Version 2.0 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM B. Alarm Lights: NFPA 72, strobe lamp fully synchronized with red lettered "FIRE" on white lens. C. Alarm Horn: NFPA 72, surface type fire alarm horn. Sound Rating: 87 dB at 10 feet. Provide integral strobe lamp fully synchronized with red lettered "FIRE" on white lens. 2.05 MISCELLANEOUS A. System shall be provided with a remote monitoring capabilities by a third party monitoring agency of the owner’s choice. B. Key box (Knox Box): Install only if required by local fire department. Install a key box emergency access system at location determined by Fire Department. C. Attic Detectors: Provide detectors for attic areas of a design and construction suitable for such environments and meeting the requirements of NFPA 72. Adjust detectors for maximum ambient attic temperature without false signaling. Provide detectors suitable for 900 square feet sensitivity, or supply alternative spacing with engineering support documentation. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install materials and systems in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and approved submittals. Install materials in proper relation with adjacent construction and with uniform appearance for exposed work. Coordinate with work of other sections. Comply with applicable regulations and building code requirements. B. Install manual station with operating handle 48 inches aff. Install audible and visual signal devise not less than 80 inches aff, and not more than 96 inches aff to bottom of lens at locations shown on Drawings. C. Use 16 AWG minimum size conductors for fire alarm initiating and signal circuit conductors. Use 14 AWG minimum size conductors for indicating appliances. Install wiring in [conduit.] [cable.] D. Mount end-of-line device in control panel for Class "A" supervision box with last device or separate box adjacent to last device in circuit for Class "B" supervision. E. Make conduit and wiring connections to door release devices, sprinkler flow switches, sprinkler valve tamper switches, fire suppression system control panels, and duct smoke detectors F. Automatic Detector Installation: Conform to NFPA 72. G. Provide and install fire strobes and strobe-alarms in each habitable room, toilet rooms, kitchen, staff lounge and other areas where shown on Drawings. H. Restore damaged finishes. I. Instruct Children of America personnel in proper operation, maintenance, and reporting requirements of fire detection and protection systems. 13851 - 4 Children of America CITY, STATE Issue Date 08.10.10 Version 2.0 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM J. 3.02 Install detectors in all areas of attic in accordance with NFPA 72 INITIAL TESTING AFTER INSTALLATION A. Test in accordance with NFPA 72 and local fire department requirements. Use "Certificate of Completion" Figure 1-7.2.1 (NFPA 72). B. Inspection: 1. Inspect equipment installation, interconnection with system devices, mounting locations, and mounting methods. 2. Verify that units and controls are properly installed, connected, and labeled and that interconnecting wires and terminals are identified. C. Pretesting: Align and adjust system and perform pretesting of components, wiring, and functions to verify conformance with specified requirements. Correct deficiencies by replacing malfunctioning or damaged items with new items. Retest until satisfactory performance and conditions are achieved. D. Acceptance Operational Tests: 1. Perform operational system tests to verify conformance with specifications: a. Each alarm initiating device installed shall be operationally tested. Each device shall be tested for alarm and trouble conditions. Contractor shall submit a written certification that the Fire Alarm System installation is complete including all punch-list items. Test battery operated emergency power supply. Test emergency power supply to minimum durations specified. Test Remote Station Signal Transmitter. Coordinate testing with Remote Station monitoring firm. Submit written documentation from Remote Station monitoring firm that Fire Alarm Signal Transmitter is operating properly. b. Test each Signal Appliance installed for proper operation. Submit written report indicating sound levels at specified distances. c. Test Fire Alarm Control Panel and Remote Annunciator. 2. Provide minimum 10 days notice of acceptance test performance schedule to Building Owner, Remote Station monitoring firm, and local fire authorities having jurisdiction. E. Retesting: Correct deficiencies and retest until total system meets the requirements of Specifications and complies with applicable standards. 3.03 TESTING A. Testing described below is a prerequisite to project completion and issuance of Certificate of Occupancy.. B. Provide a copy of all testing and certification documents to the Franchisee. Subsequent annual fire alarm system testing and filing of results to be by Franchisee after initial Occupancy. C. Provide a copy of all testing and certification documents to the Franchisee. Subsequent biennial smoke alarm sensitivity testing and filing of results to be by Franchisee after initial Occupancy. 3.04 FIRE ALARM WIRE AND CABLE COLOR CODE 13851 - 5 Children of America CITY, STATE Issue Date 08.10.10 Version 2.0 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM A. Where conduit is used, provide fire alarm circuit conductors with insulation color coded as follows, or using colored tape at each conductor termination and in each junction box. Where cable is used, identify conductors at each junction box with tags. 1. Power Branch Circuit Conductors: Black, red, white. 2. Initiating Device Circuit: Black, red. 3. Detector Power Supply: Violet, brown. 4. Signal Device Circuit: Blue (positive), white (negative) 5. Door Release: Gray, gray. END OF SECTION 13851 - 6 Children of America CITY, STATE Issue Date 08.10.10 Version 2.0 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM SECTION 13900 – FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Automatic Fire Suppression System for entire building area including all attic spaces and attic extensions, dormers, canopy and other concealed spaces. B. Controls, Pipes, Fitting, Hangers, Valves, Controllers, Signals and Sensors, and miscellaneous equipment and components for a complete fire suppression system. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Prepare a complete set of fire protection documents, signed and stamped by a Certified Fire Protection Engineer and Sprinkler Designer, licensed to practice in the State of [insert state]. Such drawings shall include all design criterion, hydraulic calculations, sprinkler equipment specifications, and a key plan showing sprinkler system layout in all areas of the Building. B. Submit documents to all authorities having jurisdiction of the sprinkler system design. Also submit to Architect-of-Record two (2) copies of complete automatic sprinkler system, prepared by a Certified Fire Protection Engineer and Sprinkler Designer licensed to practice in [insert state] and stamped with his professional seal and signature. C. Submit a copy of all test results, after installation, to Franchisee, and authorities having jurisdiction. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with governing codes and regulations. Deliver, handle, and store materials in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. B. Arrangement and details of automatic sprinkler systems are not indicated on these Drawings. Drawings, certification, and filing with authorities having jurisdiction shall be the responsibility of a Certified Fire Protection Engineer and Sprinkler Designer. C. Provide and install complete sprinkler coverage per NFPA 13, and requirements of state and local fire officials. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Provide and install complete sprinkler coverage per NFPA 13, and requirements of state and local fire officials. B. Pipe and fittings: Schedule 40 steel with threaded ends meeting NFPA requirements, or acceptable materials complying with local, state, and national standards, and NFPA 13. 13900 - 1 Children of America CITY, STATE Issue Date 08.10.10 Version 2.0 FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM C. Valves: Bronze construction; 2" and smaller with bronze bodies and bonnets with screwed ends; 2-1/2" and larger flanged. Fire valves by Grinnell, Nibco or approved equal. D. Sprinkler heads: Style as approved by Grinnell, Star, Firematic or approved equal. E. Fire department connection: Free-standing polished brass by Viking, Grinnell or approved equal. Provide threads which comply with local fire department regulations. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install all systems for proper operation in accordance with NFPA 13, 14, 20 and 24. Clean and protect work from damage. B. Instruct Children of America personnel in proper operation, maintenance, and reporting requirements of fire detection and protection systems. 3.02 TESTING A. Testing described below is a prerequisite to project completion and issuance of Certificate of Occupancy. B. Provide testing, certification, and written results of fire extinguishing systems per NFPA 13, current edition. Provide a copy of all testing and certification documents to the Franchisee. Subsequent, annual sprinkler system testing and filing of results to be by Franchisee after initial Occupancy. END OF SECTION 13900 - 2 Children of America CITY, STATE Issue Date 08.10.10 Version 2.0 FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM SECTION 15400 – PLUMBING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Provide plumbing systems including supply, waste and vent systems for: 1. Toilets 2. Kitchen Sinks, Lavatories, and Handwash Sinks. 3. Water heaters. 4. Condensate drains for HVAC equipment. 5. Hot water recirculation 6. Temperature limiting controls 7. Floor drains. 8. Service sinks. 9. Floor clean outs. 10. Access panels. 11. Grease Separator 12. Hose bibs 13. Miscellaneous plumbing components, accessories, equipment B. Coordinate each room use with Children of America to provide properly sized, adequate, and age-specific systems for each child contact area. C. Coordinate location of plumbing systems to avoid interference with location of structure and other building systems. Notify Architect prior to construction of conflicts which cannot be resolved. D. Coordinate with the electrical contractor, the wiring, power, control, protection, and circuiting of all mechanical equipment , including but not limited to pumps, valves, motors, sensors, temperature controllers, furnaces, air handlers, air conditioning condensers, exhaust fans, resistance heating equipment, outside air dampers, signaling and control equipment, and other mechanical equipment, whether lowvoltage or high-voltage for a complete HVAC and plumbing system, shown anywhere in these Drawings or described anywhere in these Specifications. Size wiring and circuits in accordance with codes. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit for approval shop drawings, product data, fixture cuts, schematics and flow diagrams, record documents. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with International Fuel Gas Code (IFCC 2006), International Plumbing Code (IPC 2006) and the local utility rules and regulations, and other codes and regulations of local jurisdictions and public utilities. B. Comply with governing codes and regulations. Provide products of acceptable manufacturers which have been in satisfactory use in similar service for three years. Use experienced installers. Deliver, handle, and store materials in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. 15400 - 1 CHILDREN OF AMERICA Issue Date 07-23-10 PLUMBING C. Arrangement of systems indicated on the drawings is diagrammatic and indicates the minimum requirements for plumbing work. Site conditions shall determine the actual arrangement of runs, bends, offsets, and similar items. Take field measurements before fabrication. Be responsible for accuracy of dimensions and layout. Overhead piping shall be laid out to obtain maximum head room. No mechanical joints shall be in a concealed area. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Provide plumbing systems components and all required accessories including shutoffs and clean-outs. Provide components which prevent back-siphonage or crossconnections. B. Sanitary, waste and vent piping, including furnace and water heater venting systems: Schedule 40, PVC. C. Hot and cold water piping: Copper only. Type K annealed for underslab use, and Type L seamless hard drawn for above slab use. Use brazed joints only for underslab fittings. Use ASTM B32, Grade 95TA joints, for fittings. Slope all piping to drain toward drainoff cocks. All dissimilar metal fittings to be isolated with approved dielectric fittings. All joint solder and brazing material shall be 100% lead free. D. Hangers: For cast iron, provide heavy wrought iron pipe hangers, brackets or clamps at 5' intervals. Fasten with lag screw or with expansion shields as applicable. For copper water piping, provide adjustable wrought iron copper plated hangers at 6' intervals maximum. Provide hangers to allow for full thickness of insulation. Do not use dissimilar metal hangers. E. Sleeves and escutcheons: Galvanized wrought iron. Where uncovered pipes pass through finished areas, provide heavy chromed escutcheons. F. Covering and insulation: For all hot and cold water piping provide minimum 1/2" flexible foamed tubing by Owens Corning or Armstrong 1/2" Armaflex or approved equal. Seal joints vapor tight. Insulate valves and fittings including water service piping with equal thickness of pipe insulation. Provide 18 gauge protection saddles between insulation and pipe hangers. Comply with fire regulations. G. Drain, Trap, and Water Line Protective Insulation: For all lavatories with drains, traps, and water lines exposed to contact, provide approved molded vinyl, antimicrobial, impact resistant, hard-shell insulation covering entire drain, including trap and tailpiece, water supply lines, stops, and connectors. "Lav-Guard", or "Lav-Shield", by Truebro, Inc. (800) 340-5969. H. Valves and shut-offs: Full size bronze ball valves for hot and cold water branches. Provide drainage valves. Provide units by Hammond, Jenkins, Nibco or approved equal. I. HB - Frost-proof Hose Bibb: installed where indicated on the plans. Anti-siphon nonfreeze recessed wall hydrant, removable key handle, cast polished brass face, with vacuum breaker. Manufactured by Woodford Model No. 67 or J.R. Smith No. 5609QT. or approved equal. Mount hose bibs 18 inches from spout to finished grade. 15400 - 2 CHILDREN OF AMERICA Issue Date 07-23-10 PLUMBING J. FD - Floor Drain: Cast iron floor drain with polished nickel-bronze top, adjustable strainer with flashing clamp device by Zurn No. Z-415-B (round)., J.R. Smith No. 2005Y-A, Josam No. 3000-S, or approved equal. Trap primers as required by local code. K. CO - Cleanout: (Interior) Cast-iron floor or wall cleanout, with clean-out plug and adjustable round top. Units by Wade No. 6000-Z. L. SA - Shock absorbers: Installed at each cold water supply line at each water closet and additionally as otherwise required by National Standard Plumbing Code (NSPC 2000); Amendments to NSPC 2000 Shock absorber to consist of a site fabricated, sealed copper air chamber, minimum 1" diameter x 12" high, or pre-fabricated units by Josm, J.R. Smith No. 5005 – 5050, or Zurn No. Z-1700 Shocktrol. M. MV - Domestic water mixing valve self-contained thermostatic type including hot water temperature limit, check valves, strainers, analog temperature gauge and stop valves by Powers Model No. 433; Leonard Model No. TM-50-E; Symmons Model No. 5-400; or approved equal. Mixing valve shall be approved by or acceptable to the State Health Department. Provide temperature gauge for tempered water. 1. Mixing valve total flow rate: 24- 30 gpm 2. Maximum pressure differential: 10 psi 2. Minimum Inlet: 3/4” ø 3. Minimum Outlet: 1” ø N. WH-1 - Water Heating System: Commercial-Grade, 50 gallon, gas-fired, 3-year tank warranty, solid state temperature and ignition control with LED fault display and settings display. Rheem-Ruud Advantage Commercial Gas water heater, Model No. HE80-160. Provide approved Schedule 40 PVC ventilation piping not less than 3 inches in diameter, and terminating through the roof with a concentric PVC flue vent & intake assembly. 1. Input: 160,000 btu/hr 2. Thermal Efficiency: 95% 3. Recovery: 184 gph @ 100 degree F rise 4. Temperature: 160°F maximum setpoint 5. Water heaters shall be equipped with pressure and temperature relief protection. The drain line from the temperature and pressure relief valve shall be galvanized pipe or hard drawn copper. This line will drain into an approved receptor in a manner constituting an indirect waste. Dielectric unions will be used throughout to connect copper water lines to the water heater. No valve or other device which may interfere with flow, shall be installed between any relief valve and the tank (or heater) which the relief valve serves. 6. Circulation pump (with timer), fittings, valves, check valves, flow valves, expansion tanks, sensors, temperature controls, and any and all components necessary to provide a complete hot water recirculation system providing instant hot water at temperatures noted in local Day Care Regulations at all hot water outlets throughout the building, except as noted below. 7. Provide direct hot water, without routing through circulation pump or temperature control mixing valve, to janitor's mop sink, kitchen sinks, kitchen handwash sink. Provide temperature at non-tempered faucets to be [140 degrees F and 160 degrees F maximum temperature.] 8. Water heater equipment, materials, design and installation shall meet the requirements of the National Standard Plumbing Code (NSPC 2000); and ASHRAE Standard 90.1b-1992, 9. Water heater shall be design certified by the CSA for the following criteria: 15400 - 3 CHILDREN OF AMERICA Issue Date 07-23-10 PLUMBING a. b. c. d. e. f. Operation at 160º Safety and construction requirements of ANSI Z21.10.3. Automatic storage or instantaneous water heater. Automatic circulating tank water heater. For operation on combustible floors and in alcove installations. Certified for 150 PSI maximum working pressure O. Access panels: Metal units with locks by Karp, Milcor, Nystrom or approved equal. Configuration and trim as required by finish wall surface. P. Gas Piping: Black steel piping or other approved piping system. System components, piping, and installation shall comply with [International Fuel Gas Code] [ International Plumbing Code] and local utility 2.02 FIXTURE SCHEDULE A. Water closets and accessories: White, floor-mounted, vitreous china water closet, by Gerber. Water closet flushometers by Toto or approved equal. White open-front toilet seats with encased stainless steel hinges by Olsonite, Bemis, Beneke, or Church. Orient flush valve handles to open side of stalls per ADA. 1. WC-1 – Training Water Closet – Commercial Top Spud Bowl by Gerber Model 25-870, white vitreous china with Toto Model TMTI NNC, 1.6 gpf. flush-meter valve, bolt caps and open front plastic seat without cover. 2. WC-2 - Preschool Water Closet – Commercial Top Spud Bowl by Gerber Model 25-820, white vitreous china with Toto Model TMTI NNC, 1.6 gpf flushmeter valve, bolt caps and open front plastic seat without cover. 3. WC-3 - ADA Water Closet – Commercial Top Spud Bowl by Gerber Model 25-730, white vitreous china with Toto Model TMTI NNC, 1.6 gpf flushmeter valve, bolt caps and open front plastic seat without cover. B. Lavatories and accessories: White vitreous china lavatories with 4" faucet centers by American Standard, Kohler, or approved equal. American Standard, Kohler or Moen gooseneck spout faucet with wrist blade control handles, grid strainer, tail piece and accessories. Provide sink trap and hot water line insulation per ADA requirements. 1. L-1 – Training Lavatory – Gerber #12-314, white, vitreous china, wall hung lavatory. Mount at 24” above finish floor. Gerber #43-135 Maxwell Faucet, chrome, with drain assembly. 2. L-2 – Preschool Lavatory – Gerber #12-314, white, vitreous china, wall hung lavatory. Mount at 30” above finish floor. Gerber #43-135 Maxwell Faucet, chrome, with drain assembly. 3. L-3 – ADA Lavatory – Gerber #12-314, white, vitreous china, wall hung lavatory. Mount at 34” above finish floor. Gerber ADA Compliant Chrome Faucet, wrist blade handles and drain assembly. C. Stainless steel sinks and Countertops: Self-rimming, stainless steel sinks with 4" faucet centers, 3-1/2" drain openings, and all-stainless steel rotary lever operated drain fittings with grid strainer by Dayton or approved equal. American Standard gooseneck faucet with blade control handles, removable strainer/stopper, and accessories. All components in these sinks, including strainer, tailpiece, drains, etc. shall be Type 302 stainless steel. 1. S-1 – Sink – Dayton Model D11515, self rimming, stainless steel with 15”X15”X5” bowl size with LK-35 Basket Strainer and Neoprene Stopper and with Gerber #49-251 Chrome Faucet. 15400 - 4 CHILDREN OF AMERICA Issue Date 07-23-10 PLUMBING 2. 3. 4. 5. S-2 – Sink – Elkay Model CR2522, self rimming, stainless steel with 25”X22”X7” bowl size with Basket Strainer and Neoprene Stopper and with Gerber #49-251 Chrome Faucet. S-3 - Sink – Three compartment – Universal Stainless Steel Sink Model #MS3N16-2D10, Basket Strainers and Neoprene stoppers and with USF 12 Chrome faucets. [Verify local code for need of indirect drainage] S-4 – Sink – Elkay Model CHS1716C, hand wash sink 16 3/4”X15 1/2”X6” bowl size with Basket Strainer and Neoprene Stopper and with Elkay LK940GN04L2H Chrome Faucet. S-5 Mop Sink – Floor Mounted, Mustee Model 63M with wall mounted Chrome faucet Gerber Model 44-640. 1. Mount faucet at 36 inches above floor, centered above mop sink long dimension. Provide solid blocking for faucet and diagonal brace mounting. 2. Mount vacuum breaker at 90 inches above floor. 3. Coordinate location of mop holder rack to permit mops to hang above self-draining mop shelf. 4. Set mop sink in full adhesive slurry bedding and provide continuous edge sealing flange on 3 sides. E. DF-1 - Electric Water Cooler: Two station wall-mounted, hi-low style, ANSI/NSF 61 compliant, barrier-free 8 g.p.h. electric water coolers, each with front and side push bars. Model EMABFTL8C by Elkay Manufacturing. Mounting height to spouts as shown on drawings, with wall brace by Brass Craft No. CR1912ASS with 12” riser. F. OF-1 - Outdoor Water Fountains: barrier-free outdoor units for direct connection to cold water line. Model EDFP-214-C by Elkay Manufacturing. Mounting height as shown on drawings. Provide water supply line with shut-off valve to each bubbler, inside building, above ceiling. Provide freeze proof trap by running trap drain inside foundation wall below floor slab, locating trap in heated side of exterior wall, or providing for code-approved trap drain-out. Provide wall bracing as required and WP2 Wall Plate for both fountains G. GS –Grease Separator: Rockford Separator Model No. GF1820; 17 gallon liquid holding capacity, intermittent flow rate of 20 gpm, and a greasy sludge capacity of 70 lbs. and a grease capacity of 40 lbs. for 100% capacity of SS-3 fixture. 1. Separator shall intercept waste line by means of an approved indirect drain on 3-basin stainless steel sink (SS-3). [Install recessed in floor and with an approved built-in flow control, cover flush with finished floor] [ install electromechanical unit under sink; connect to drain lines as recommended by manufacturer], and in the location shown on Drawings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install materials and systems in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and approved submittals. Install materials in proper relation with adjacent construction and with uniform appearance for exposed work. Coordinate with work of other sections. Comply with applicable regulations and building code requirements. 15400 - 5 CHILDREN OF AMERICA Issue Date 07-23-10 PLUMBING B. Support piping properly. Pitch to drain points. Install with pipe expansion loops, mechanical expansion joints, and anchors. C. Install shutoff valves on each piece of equipment on both hot and cold water supply. Provide shutoffs in ceiling for outdoor water bubblers, 12-24 inches from exterior wall pipe drops. D. Insulate all above-slab water piping. Provide pipe sleeves for through-slab penetrations of all piping. E. Clearly label all valves and components. F. Trenches: 1. Plumbing trenches under slabs shall be backfilled and compacted with granular material. 2. Building Drain underslab plumbing trenches shall avoid stressed subgrade areas from interior concrete footings. If such conflict occurs, building drain shall be thoroughly isolated from poured concrete by being cushioned in sand of clean granular backfill to the satisfaction of the architect. 3. Provide blockouts as needed in concrete foundations, piers, and footings to permit installation of downspout leaders. Hold all downspouts and leaders directly in contact with the face of the building. G. Sanitary 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. H. System: Laying Pipe: Establish all flow conditions prior to commencing work in order to avoid conflicts. Verify overall system flow from fixtures to mains to eliminate unnecessary piping, and within Code limitations. Contractor will be allowed reasonable variations from the established grades and elevations of those shown on the plans in order to meet the final and exact field conditions. Place underslab building drain with a slope of 1/4" per foot. Layout of Piping: The Drawings indicate a diagrammatic layout of underslab plumbing, including drain connections to main building drain. The flow direction, and invert elevations at building cleanouts are determined by the final site drainage and grading plans in the civil engineering drawings. The Contractor shall confirm overall site flow conditions prior to commencing work. Cleanouts: Install cleanouts as shown. Locate building end cleanouts with lowest invert closest to sanitary sewer main. Install upstream cleanout at opposite building end or as otherwise shown. Set inverts to permit a slope of not more than 1/4" per foot. Exterior cleanouts shall not be located within concrete walk. Extend all cleanouts as required to terminate in finished lawn or plant bedding. See detail on Drawings. Vents: Fixtures will be vented as indicated on the drawings or as otherwise required by Codes. Vents and soil stacks will be extended through the roof at not less than 3 inches in diameter, and are to be terminated 10" above the roof and flashed with an approved flashing assembly. Grease Separator: Install a recessed-in-slab grease separator where shown on drawings, or as otherwise instructed by the local authority having jurisdiction. Separator shall receive indirect waste lines from the following fixtures, before joining the building drain: a. SS-3 3-basin stainless steel sink, 1 faucet Flush Valve Installation: 1. Install flush valves at a height or separation that does not interfere with full use of grab bars. 15400 - 6 CHILDREN OF AMERICA Issue Date 07-23-10 PLUMBING 2. I. Water 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. J. Orient all flush valve operator handles to be located on the side opposite the grab bars (i.e. open side of stall) in accordance with ADA. When toilets have no grab bars, valve handle may be located on either side. System: Shut Offs: An easily accessible drainable, full-flow ball valve will be provided in the water service line. A full-flow ball valve will be installed on the cold water inlet side of the hot water heater in the immediate vicinity of the heater. A fullflow ball valve will be installed above ceiling on the cold water lines supplying outside water bubblers (WB). The main water service will have a full-flow ball valve installed. Water supply lines to all fixtures (i.e. water closets, lavatories, kitchen sinks, etc.), will have stops installed immediately below the fixture. Piping: Water service pipes or any underground water pipes will not be run or laid in the same trench with building sewer or drainage piping. Water lines passing through concrete slabs are to be separated from the slab with approved sleeve insulation. This material shall also be used to separate water lines from hangers or supports where different materials or dissimilar metals are used, or to prevent vibration damage and sound deadening. Provide hot water recirculation to all sinks and lavatories shown on the recirculation loop. Circulation pump shall be on a timer. Hot water loop shall be equipped with a temperature limiting device setting for water temperature at any point of use to be not less than [100 degrees F and not more than 115 degrees F.] Provide direct hot water to 2 and 3 basin kitchen sinks, kitchen handwash sink, and janitor's mop sink. Do not recirculate hot water or run through temperature limiting device. Set hot water use temperature for these fixtures to not less than [170 degrees F.] [insert required temperature] Sterilize water distribution system. Flush and test all systems for proper operation. Purge all domestic water piping of deleterious matter and disinfect in accordance with [International Plumbing Code] and local requirements. Insulate all water lines above slab inside building. Adjust, improve, support, or otherwise modify system as required to prevent water hammer, pipe vibration, or other plumbing-borne noise or vibration. Locate shock absorbers in water piping system at each water closet; and additional areas in accordance with [International Plumbing Code] and local requirements HVAC Condensate Drain System: 1. Each attic air handler shall be provided with a separate condensate drain with a direct connection to a P-trap. Condensate drains shall not be combined into a single condensate drain without resizing the drain, and providing a dedicated and properly sized P-trap drain in a concealed location. Drawings show each condensate draining into a fixture P-trap. Any changes in this design must be submitted by a licensed mechanical engineer, retained by the Contractor, and subject to approval by the Architect. 2. Provide freeze protection on all condensate lines, pans, traps, etc. in attics 3. Contractor shall provide and install a separate galvanized steel safe pan beneath each air handler. Plastic safe pans are not permitted in Children of America Schools. K. Hangers or Supports: Conform to requirements of local plumbing code. L. Escutcheons: Chrome plated required where pipes pass through wall or floor. Chrome plated ring for water closet and lavatories. 15400 - 7 CHILDREN OF AMERICA Issue Date 07-23-10 PLUMBING M. Exposed Fixture Piping and Fittings: Exposed piping and fittings for all lavatories, water closets, and handicapped kitchen sinks, are to be chrome or satin finish. The stops, supplies and P-traps on outdoor water fountains will be not less than 17 gauge and are to be equipped with a clean out on the bottom of the trap N. Provide approved hard-shell insulation on all plumbing drains and traps, and all hot water lines and stops exposed beneath wall mounted lavatories. Install insulation in a neatly with tight seams, and fully supported to prevent sagging, dislodging, or tampering. Submit for review, catalog cuts or samples of drain insulation products. O. Gas Piping: All gas piping materials, methods, and installations shall comply with the [International Fuel Gas Code] [ International Plumbing Code] and the local utility regulations 1. Installation, inspections, and purging of gas piping installations shall comply with the [International Fuel Gas Code] [ International Plumbing Code] and the local utility regulations P. Tests: Contractor is to provide testing in accordance with the [International Fuel Gas Code] [ International Plumbing Code] and the local utility regulations. Q. Restore damaged finishes. Clean and protect work from damage. R. Instruct Owner’s personnel in proper operation of systems. END OF SECTION 15400 - 8 CHILDREN OF AMERICA Issue Date 07-23-10 PLUMBING PACKAGED ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONING UNITS PART 1 1.01 GENERAL SECTION INCLUDES A. Package roof top unit. B. Heat exchanger. C. Refrigeration components. D. Unit operating controls. E. Roof curb. F. Electrical power connections. G. Operation and maintenance service. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 15170 - Motors. B. Section 15242 - Vibration Isolation. C. Section 15290 - Ductwork Insulation. D. Section 15885 - Air Cleaning. E. Section 15952 - Controls and Instrumentation. F. Section 16180 - Equipment Wiring Systems. 1.03 REFERENCES A. NFPA 90 A & B - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilation Systems and Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems. (all) B. ANSI/ASHRAE 15 - Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration. (all) C. AHRI 360 - Commercial and Industrial Unitary Air Conditioning Equipment testing and rating standard. (g/e, c/e above 135,000 btuh) 1 D. AHRI 340 - Commercial and Industrial Unitary Heat pump Equipment.(hp above 135,000 btuh) E. ANSI/ASHRAE 37 - Testing Unitary Air Conditioning and Heat Pump Equipment. (all) F. ANSI/ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-1999 - Energy Standard for New Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential Buildings. G. ANSI Z21.47/UL1995 - Unitary Air Conditioning Standard for safety requirements. H. California Energy Commission Administrative Code Title 20/24 - Establishes the minimum efficiency requirements for HVAC equipment installed in new buildings in the State of California. (all) I. AHRI 210/240 - Unitary Air-Conditioning Equipment and Air- Source Heat Pump Equipment. (all under 135,000 btuh) J. AHRI 270 - Sound Rating of Outdoor Unitary Equipment. (all below 135,000) K. AHRI 370 - Sound Rating of Large Outdoor Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Equipment.(all above 135,000 Btuh) L. ANSI/NFPA 70-1995 1.04 - National Electric Code. (all) SUBMITTALS A. Submit unit performance data including: capacity, nominal and operating performance. B. Submit Mechanical Specifications for unit and accessories describing construction, components and options. C. Submit shop drawings indicating overall dimensions as well as installation, operation and services clearances. Indicate lift points and recommendations and center of gravity. Indicate unit shipping, installation and operating weights including dimensions. 2 D. Submit data on electrical requirements and connection points. Include recommended wire and fuse sizes or MCA, sequence of operation, safety and start-up instructions. E. Shop drawings submitted for approval shall be accompanied by a copy of the purchase agreement between the Contractor and an authorized service representative of the manufacturer for check, test and start up and first year service. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE and HANDLING A. Comply with manufacturer's installation instructions for rigging, unloading, and transporting units. B. Protect units from physical damage. Leave factoryshipping covers in place until installation. 1.06 WARRANTY A. Provide parts warranty (excluding refrigerant) for one year from start-up or 18 months from shipment, whichever occurs first. B. Provide five-year extended warranty for compressors. 1.07 A. REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS Unit shall conform to ANSI Z21.47/UL1995 for construction of packaged air conditioner 1. PART 2 2.01 A. In the event the unit is not UL approved, the manufacturer must, at his expense, provide for a field inspection by a UL representative to verify conformance to UL standards. If necessary, contractor shall perform modifications to the unit to comply with UL, as directed by the UL representative, at no additional expense to the Owner. PRODUCTS SUMMARY The contractor shall furnish and install package 3 rooftop unit(s) as shown and scheduled on the contract documents. The unit(s) shall be installed in accordance with this specification and perform at the specified conditions as scheduled. B. APPROVED MANUFACTURERS 1. Trane: Standard efficient Precedent Gas Heating/Electric Cooling rooftop unit. a. 3-5 Tons: 15 SEER Trane YHC036/048/060 b. 6-10 Tons: 12.6 (minimum) EER Trane YHC072/092/102/120 2.02 Substitutions: 14 working days prior approval required as indicated under the general and/or supplemental conditions of these specifications. Mechanical contractor shall be responsible for electrical and mechanical changes to the structure when using a product other than the specified product. As built drawing changes are the responsibility of the mechanical contractor. 2.03 GENERAL UNIT DESCRIPTION A. Unit(s) furnished and installed shall be packaged rooftop (s) as scheduled on contract documents and these specifications. Cooling capacity ratings shall be based on AHRI Standard 210/240. Unit(s) shall consist of insulated weather-tight casing with compressor(s), air-cooled condenser coil, condenser fans, evaporator coil, return-air filters, supply motors and unit controls. B. Unit(s) shall be 100% factory run tested and fully charged with R-410A. C. Unit(s) shall have labels, decals, and/or tags to aid in the service of the unit and indicate caution areas. D. Units shall be convertible airflow design as manufactured. E. Wiring internal to the unit shall be colored and 4 numbered for identification. 2.04 UNIT CASING A. Cabinet: Galvanized steel, phosphatized, and with an air-dry paint coating with removable panels. Structural members shall be 18 gauge access doors and removable panels of minimum gauge. B. Units cabinet surface shall be tested 1000 hours in salt spray test in compliance with ASTM B117. C. Cabinet construction shall allow for all service/ maintenance from one side of the unit. D. Cabinet top cover shall be one piece construction or where seams exits, it shall be double-hemmed and gasket-sealed. E. Access Panels: Water- and air-tight panels with handles shall provide access to filters, heating section, return air fan section, supply air fan section, evaporator coil section, and unit control section. F. Units base pan shall have a raised 1 1/8 inch high lip around the supply and return openings for water integrity. G. Insulation: Provide 1/2 inch thick fiberglass insulation with foil face on all exterior panels in contact with the return and conditioned air stream. All edges must be captured so that there is no insulation exposed in the air stream. H. Provide openings either on side of unit or through the base for power, control, condensate, and gas connections. I. The base of the unit shall have 3 sides for forklift provisions. The base of the units shall have rigging/lifting holes for crane maneuvering. 2.05 AIR FILTERS 5 finished access with 20 A. 2.06 Air Filters: Factory installed filters shall mount integral within the unit and shall be accessible through access panels. 2 inch thick MERV 7 or greater filters to be field- provided and installed. FANS AND MOTORS A. Provide evaporator fan section with forward curved, double width, double inlet, centrifugal type fan. B. Provide self-aligning, grease lubricated, ball or sleeve bearings with permanent lubrication fittings. C. Provide units 5 tons and below with direct drive, multiple speed, dynamically balanced supply fans. D. Provide units 6 tons and above with belt driven, supply fans with adjustable motor sheaves. E. Outdoor and Indoor Fan shall be permanently lubricated and have internal thermal overload protection. F. Outdoor fans shall be direct drive, statically and dynamically balanced, draw through in the vertical discharge position. G. Provide shafts constructed of solid hot rolled steel, ground and polished, with key-way, and protectively coated with lubricating oil. 2.07 GAS FIRED HEATING SECTION A. Completely assembled and factory installed heating system shall be integral to unit, UL or CSA approved specifically for outdoor applications for use downstream from refrigerant cooling coils. Threaded connection with plug or cap provided. Provide capability for gas piping <<CONNECTION>>. B. Heating section shall be factory run tested prior to shipment. C. Induced draft combustion type with direct spark ignition system, redundant main gas valve, and 2staged heat. 6 D. Gas Burner Safety Controls: Provide safety controls for the proving of combustion air prior to ignition, and continuous flame supervision. Provide flame rollout switches. E. Induced draft blower shall have combustion air proving switches and built-in thermal overload protection on fan motor. F. Heat Exchanger: Provide tubular section type constructed from 18-gauge aluminized steel. G. Burners: Burners shall be of the in-shot type constructed of stainless steel. H. Limit controls: High temperature limit controls will shut off gas flow in the event of excessive temperatures resulting from restricted indoor airflow or loss of indoor airflow. 2.08 EVAPORATOR COIL A. Provide configured aluminum fin surface mechanically bonded to copper tubing coil. B. Provide an independent expansion device for each refrigeration circuit. Factory pressure tested at 450 psig and leak tested at 200 psig. C. Provide a removable, reversible, cleanable double sloped drain pan for base of evaporator coil constructed of PVC. 2.09 A. 2.10 A. CONDENSER SECTION Provide vertical discharge, direct drive fans with aluminum blades. Fans shall be statically balanced. Motors shall be permanently lubricated, with integral thermal overload protection in a weather tight casing. REFRIGERATION SYSTEM Compressor(s): Provide scroll compressor with direct drive operating at 3600 rpm. Integral centrifugal oil pump. Provide suction gas cooled motor with winding 7 temperature limits and compressor overloads. B. Units shall have cooling capabilities down to 0 degree F as standard. For field-installed low ambient accessory, the manufacturer shall provide a factoryauthorized service technician that will assure proper installation and operation. C. Provide each unit with 2 refrigerant circuit(s) (if available) factory-supplied completely piped with liquid line filter-drier, suction and liquid line pressure ports. 2.11 A. 2.12 OUTDOOR AIR SECTION Provide 0-50% motorized outside air damper. OPERATING CONTROLS A. Provide microprocessor unit-mounted DDC control which when used with an electronic zone sensor provides proportional integral room control. This UCM shall perform all unit functions by making all heating, cooling, and ventilating decisions through resident software logic. B. Provide factory-installed indoor evaporator defrost control to prevent compressor slugging by interrupting compressor operation. C. Provide an anti-cycle timing and minimum on/off between stages timing in the microprocessor. D. Economizer Preferred Cooling (if supplied with economizer) - Compressor operation is integrated with economizer cycle to allow mechanical cooling when economizer is not adequate to satisfy zone requirements. Compressors are enabled if space temperature is recovering to cooling setpoint at a rate of less than 0.2 degrees per minute. Compressor low ambient lockout overrides this function. 2.13 A. STAGING CONTROLS Provide NEC Class II, electronic, adjustable zone control to maintain zone temperature setting. 8 2.14 UNIT PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Unit must meet or exceeded all scheduled performance. Please see plans for schedule values. B. Scheduled performance shall be based on AHRI 210/240/340/360 and ANSI Z21.47 test conditions. 2.15 ROOF CURB A. Contractor shall provide factory supplied roof curb, 16 gauge perimeter made of zinc coated steel with supply and return air gasketing and wood nailer strips. Ship knocked down and provided with instructions for easy assembly. B. Curb shall be manufactured in accordance with the National Roofing Contractors Association guidelines. PART 3 3.01 EXECUTION EXAMINATION A. Contractor shall verify that roof is ready to receive work and opening dimensions are as. B. Contractor shall verify that proper power supply is available. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Contractor shall install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Mount units on factory built roof mounting frame providing watertight enclosure to protect ductwork and utility services. Install roof mounting curb level. 3.03 A. MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES The manufacturer shall furnish an alternative price for: 1. Extended parts and labor by manufacturer to be provided to the owner for a period of 5 years. 9 2. B. Complete parts and labor service and maintenance of packaged roof top units for 5 years from Date of Substantial Completion. The contractor shall furnish manufacturer complete submittal wiring diagrams of the package unit as applicable for field maintenance and service. END OF SECTION 10 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM PART 1: GENERAL 1.0 DESCRIPTION A. General: The control system shall be as indicated on the drawings and described in the specifications, and consist of a peer-to-peer network of digital building control panels and operator workstation(s). The user interface shall through any personal computer available on the network. The PC shall provide users an interface with the system though dynamic color graphics of building areas and systems. B. Direct Digital Control (DDC) technology shall be used to provide the functions necessary for control of systems defined for control on this project. C. The control system shall accommodate simultaneous multiple user operation. Access to the control system data should be limited by operator ID and password. An operator shall be able to log onto any PC on the designated network and have access to all designated data. D. The control system shall be designed such that each mechanical system will operate under standalone control. As such, in the event of a network communication failure, or the loss of other controllers, the control system shall continue to independently operate the unaffected equipment. E. Communication between the control panels and all workstations shall be over a high-speed network. All nodes on this network shall be peers. A modem or internet connectivity may be provided for remote access to the system. 1.1 APPROVED CONTROL SYSTEM CONTRACTORS AND MANUFACTURERS A. Approved Control System Contractors and Manufacturers: Manufacturer Name Trane Product Line Tracer Contractor Name/Address Trane District Sales Office Contact Joe Neri 561-683-1521 [email protected] 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. System Installer Qualifications 1. The Installer shall have an established working relationship with the Control System Manufacturer of not less than three years. 2. The Installer shall have successfully completed Control System Manufacturer's classes on the control system. The Installer shall present for review the certification of completed training, including the hours of instruction and course outlines upon request. 3. The installer shall have an office within 50 miles of the project site and provide 24-hour response in the event of a customer call. 1.8 CODES AND STANDARDS A. Work, materials, and equipment shall comply with the rules and regulations of all codes and ordinances of local, state and federal authorities. As a minimum, the installation shall comply with the current editions in effect 30 days prior to receipt of bids of the following codes: 1. National Electric Code (NEC) 2. International Building Code (IBC) 3. International Mechanical Code (IMC) 4. Underwriters Laboratories: Products shall be UL-916-PAZX listed. TracerSCGuideSpec-1.doc 6/10 1 5. ISO/IEC 14908-1 (LonTalk) 1.9 SUBMITTALS A. Contractor shall provide shop drawings and manufacturers’ standard specification data sheets on all hardware and software to be provided. No work may begin on any segment of this project until the Engineer and Owner have reviewed submittals for conformity with the plan and specifications. Six (6) copies are required. All shop drawings shall be provided to the Owner electronically as .dwg or .dxf file formats. B. Quantities of items submitted shall be reviewed by the Engineer and Owner. Such review shall not relieve the contractor from furnishing quantities required for completion. C. Provide the Engineer and Owner, any additional information or data which is deemed necessary to determine compliance with these specifications or which is deemed valuable in documenting the system to be installed. D. Submit the following within 30 days of contract award: 1. A complete bill of materials of equipment to be used indicating quantity, manufacturer and model number. A schedule of all control valves including the valve size, model number (including pattern and connections), flow, CV, pressure rating, and location. A schedule of all control dampers. This shall include the damper size, pressure drop, manufacturer and model number. Provide manufacturers cut sheets for major system components. When manufacturer's cut sheets apply to a product series rather than a specific product, the data specifically applicable to the project shall be highlighted or clearly indicated by other means. Each submitted piece of literature and drawings shall clearly reference the specification and/or drawing that the submittal is being submitted to cover. Include: 2. 3. 4. a) b) c) d) e) Building Controllers Custom Application Controllers Application Specific Controllers Auxiliary Control Devices Proposed control system riser diagram showing system configuration, device locations, addresses, and cabling f) Detailed termination drawings showing all required field and factory terminations. Terminal numbers shall be clearly labeled g) Points list showing all system objects, and the proposed English language object names h) Sequence of operations for each system under control. This sequence shall be specific for the use of the Control System being provided for this project E. Project Record Documents. Upon completion of installation submit three (3) copies of record (asbuilt) documents. The documents shall be submitted for approval prior to final completion and include: 1. 2. 3. Project Record Drawings. These shall be as-built versions of the submittal shop drawings. One set of electronic media including CAD .DWG or .DXF drawing files shall also be provided. Testing and Commissioning Reports and Checklists. Operating and Maintenance (O & M) Manual. These shall be as-built versions of the submittal product data. In addition to that required for the submittals, the O & M manual shall include: a) Names, address and 24-hour telephone numbers of Contractors installing equipment, and the control systems and service representative of each. b) Provide on-line help for documenting operator instructions TracerSCGuideSpec-1.doc 6/10 2 c) A listing and documentation of all custom software created using the programming language including the point database. One set of magnetic media containing files of the software and database shall also be provided. d) One set of electronic media containing files of all color-graphic screens created for the project. e) Complete original issue documentation, installation, and maintenance information for all third party hardware provided including computer equipment and sensors. f) Licenses and warranty documents for all equipment and systems. g) Recommended preventive maintenance procedures for all system components including a schedule of tasks, time between tasks, and task descriptions. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Warrant all work as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. Labor & materials for control system specified shall be warranted free from defects for a period of twelve (12) months after final completion acceptance by the Owner. Control System failures during the warranty period shall be adjusted, repaired, or replaced at no charge or reduction in service to the Owner. The Contractor shall respond to the Owner's request for warranty service within 24 hours during customary business hours. At the end of the final start-up/testing, if equipment and systems are operating satisfactorily to the Owner and Engineer, the Owner shall sign certificates certifying that the control system's operation has been tested and accepted in accordance with the terms of this specification. The date of Owner's acceptance shall be the start of warranty. Operator workstation software, project specific software, graphics, database, and firmware updates shall be provided to the Owner at no charge during the warranty period. Written authorization by Owner must, however, be granted prior to the installation of such changes. The system provider shall provide a web-accessible system and support on-line resource that provides the Owner access to a question/answer forum, graphics library, user tips, upgrades, and manufacturer training schedules. 1.11 OWNERSHIP OF PROPRIETARY MATERIAL A. All project-developed hardware and software shall become the property of the Owner. These items include but are not limited to: 1. Project graphic images 2. Record drawings 3. Project database 4. Project-specific application programming code 5. All documentation PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.0 SECTION INCLUDES .1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6 .7 .8 .9 Materials Communication Operator Interface Application and Control Software System Controllers Custom Application Controllers Application Specific Controllers Input/Output Interface Auxiliary Control Devices 2.1 MATERIALS TracerSCGuideSpec-1.doc 6/10 3 A. All products used in this installation shall be new, currently under manufacture, and shall be applied in similar installations for a minimum of 1 year. The installation shall not be used as a test site for any new products unless explicitly approved by the Owner’s representative in writing. Spare parts shall be available for at least 5 years after completion of this contract. 2.2 COMMUNICATION A. This project shall comprise of a network utilizing high-speed LonTalk for communications between System Controllers. LonTalk or BACnet MSTP sub-networks shall be used for communications between System Controllers, Custom Application Controllers and Application Specific Controllers. B. The Owner will provide all communication media, connectors, repeaters, network switches, and routers necessary for the internetwork. An active Ethernet jack will be provided adjacent to each System Control Panel and PC Workstation for connection to this network.] All System Controllers shall have an Ethernet communications port for connections with the operator interfaces. C. Communications services over the internetwork shall result in operator interface and value passing that is transparent to the internetwork architecture as follows: 1. Connection of an operator interface device to any one System controller on the internetwork will allow the operator to interface with all other System controllers as if that interface were directly connected to the other controllers. Data, status information, reports, system software, custom programs, etc., for all System controllers shall be available for viewing and editing from any one System controller on the internetwork. 2. All database values (i.e., points, software variable, custom program variables) of any one System controller shall be readable by any other System controller on the internetwork. This value passing shall be automatically performed by a controller when a reference to a point name not located in that controller is entered into the controller's database. An operator/installer shall not be required to set up any communications services to perform internetwork value passing. F. The time clocks in all System controllers shall be automatically synchronized daily. 2.3 OPERATOR INTERFACE A. The owner shall provide an operator workstation PC. These workstations shall reside on the Enterprise wide network, which is same high-speed network as the System controllers. The Enterprise wide network will be provided by the owner and supports the Internet Protocol (IP). Workstations shall also be able to dial into the system.] B. Each operator workstation shall consist of the following: 1. 2. D. Personal Computer ,shall have internet explorer 7.0 or higher or Firefox 3.0 or higher Modems. Furnish auto-dial telephone modems and associated cables as required for communication to remote buildings, and workstations. The modem shall be capable of transmitting at up to 56K baud, and communicate over voice-grade telephone lines. User Interface 1. 2. Internet Browser. Furnish with either Internet Explorer 7.0 or higher, or Firefox 3.0 or higher. Java 5.0 or higher must also be installed on the PC. User interface. The system user interface shall be web based graphically orientated. Provide a method for the operator to easily move between web pages. Dynamic points TracerSCGuideSpec-1.doc 6/10 4 3. 4. E. shall include analog and binary values, dynamic text, static text, and animation files. Graphics shall have the ability to show animation of equipment. Animation capabilities shall include the ability to show a sequence of images reflecting the position of analog outputs, such as valve or damper positions. Graphics shall be capable of launching other web pages. Custom background images. Custom background images shall be created with the use of commonly available graphics packages such as Adobe Photoshop. The graphics generation package shall create and modify graphics that are saved in industry standard formats such as GIF and JPEG. Graphics Library. Furnish a library of standard HVAC equipment such as chillers, air handlers, terminals, fan coils, unit ventilators, , rooftop units, and VAV boxes, in 3dimensional graphic depictions.. The library shall be furnished in a file format compatible with the graphics generation package program. System Applications. Each System controller shall provide storage of system information. Provide the following applications at each System controller. 1. Database Save and Restore. A system operator with the proper password clearance shall be able to archive the database on the designated operator interface PC. The operator shall also be able to clear a panel database and manually initiate a download of a specified database to any panel in the system. 2. On-Line Help and Training. Provide a context sensitive, on line help system to assist the operator in operation and editing of the system. On-line help shall be available for all system functions and shall provide the relevant data for that particular screen. Additional help shall be available through the use of hypertext links onscreen. 3. Security. Each operator shall be required to log on to the system with a user name and password in order to view, edit, add, or delete data. System security shall be selectable for each operator. The system supervisor shall have the ability to set security levels for all other operators. Each operator password shall be able to restrict the operator’s access for viewing and/or changing each system application, full screen editor, and object. Each operator shall automatically be logged off of the system if no keyboard or mouse activity is detected. All system security data shall be stored in an encrypted format. 4. System Diagnostics. The system shall automatically monitor the operation of all, network connections, building management panels, and controllers. The failure of any device shall be annunciated to the operator. 5. Alarm Notification. Operator shall be notified of new alarm as they occur while navigating through any part of the system with a alarm icon. Alarm messages shall use full language, easily recognized descriptors for alarm. System will have the capability to acknowledge Alarms and add and save comments for the alarm. 6. Alarm Processing. Any object in the system shall be configurable to alarm in and out of normal state. The operator shall be able to configure the alarm limits, warning limits, states, and reactions for each object in the system. 7. Alarm Reactions. A user shall be able to determine what actions will occur if any, upon receipt of an alarm. Actions shall display on the screen, logging, start a custom control program, displaying messages, send a SMTP e-mail message that can be directly displayed on a smart phone, or forwarded to a cell phone via a text message. . Each of these actions shall be configurable by any PC and time of day. . 8. Event Log. The operator shall be able to view all logged system alarms and events from any location in the system. The operator shall be able to sort and filter alarms from events. Alarms shall be sorted in up to 4 categories based on severity. An operator with the proper security level may acknowledge and clear alarms. All that have not been cleared by the operator shall be stored by the building controller. Provide a comment field in the event log that allows a user to add specific comments associated with any alarm. 9. Dynamic Graphical Trending. The system shall have the ability to save the data collected by a trend object and display that collected data in a graphical chart. Trend viewing capabilities shall include the ability to show up to 6 points on a chart, to include live and/or historical data. Each data point trend line shall be an individual color. Navigation and viewing functions shall include scrolling and zooming of x and y axes, and a trace display of the associated time stamp, and values for any selected point along the x-axis. TracerSCGuideSpec-1.doc 6/10 5 13. 14. 15. Point Control. Provide a method for a user to view, override, and edit if applicable, the status of any object and property in the system. These statuses shall be available by menu, on graphics or through custom programs. Clock Synchronization. A designated building controller shall synchronize all other building controllers on the network. A building controller shall also be able to synchronize with a NTP server for automatic time synchronization. The system shall automatically adjust for daylight savings time if applicable. Reports and Logs. Provide a reporting package that allows the operator to select reports. A number of different reports shall be available to be selected by the user and provide current data. All reports can be set up to be run at specified intervals of time. Reports and logs shall be stored on the building controller in a format that is readily accessible by other standard software applications including spreadsheets and word processing. Reports and logs shall be readily printed to the system printer. The operator shall be able to designate reports that shall be stored to disk at selectable intervals. Provide a means to list and access the last 10 reports viewed by the user. i. ii. iii. iv. All Points in Alarm Report: Provide an on demand report showing all current alarms. All Points in Override Report: Provide an on demand report showing all overrides in effect. Commissioning Report: Provide a one time report that lists all equipment with the unit configuration and present operation. Points report: Provide a report that lists the current value of all points 2.4 APPLICATION AND CONTROL SOFTWARE A. Furnish the following applications software for building and energy management. All software applications shall reside and run in the system controllers. Editing of applications shall occur at the operator workstation. B. System Security 1. 2. 3. 4. C. User access shall be secured using individual security passwords and user names. Passwords shall restrict the user to only the objects, applications, and system functions as assigned by the system administrator User logon/logoff attempts shall be recorded. The system shall protect itself from unauthorized use by automatically logging off following the last keystroke. The delay time shall be user definable. Scheduling. Provide the capability to schedule each object or group of objects in the system. Each of these schedules shall include the capability for start, stop, optimal start, optimal stop, and night economizer actions. Each schedule may consist of up to [10] events. When a group of objects are scheduled together, provide the capability to define advances and delays for each member. Each schedule shall consist of the following: 1. 2. 3. Weekly Schedule. Provide separate schedules for each day of the week. Exception Schedules. Provide the ability for the operator to designate any day of the year as an exception schedule. This exception schedule shall override the standard schedule for that day. Exception schedules may be defined up to a year in advance. Once an exception schedule is executed it will be discarded and replaced by the standard schedule for that day of the week. Holiday Schedules. Provide the capability for the operator to define up to 99 special or holiday schedules. These schedules may be placed on the scheduling calendar and will be repeated each year. The operator shall be able to define the length of each holiday period. TracerSCGuideSpec-1.doc 6/10 6 4. Optimal Start. The scheduling application outlined above shall support an optimal start algorithm. This shall calculate the thermal characteristics of a zone and start the equipment prior to occupancy to achieve the desired space temperature at the specified occupancy time. The algorithm shall calculate separate sets of heating and cooling rates for zones that have been unoccupied for less then and greater than 24 hours. Provide the ability to modify the start algorithm based on outdoor air temperature. Provide an early start limit in minutes to prevent the system from starting before an operator determined time limit. D. Remote Communications. The system shall have the ability to transmit alarms to multiple associated alarm receivers. Receivers shall include PC Workstations, email addresses, and cell phones. The alarm message shall include the name of the alarm location, the device that generated the alarm, and the alarm message itself. The operator shall be able to remotely access and operate the system utilizing the system Ethernet communications, or dial up communications via modem, in the same format and method used on site as described under the Operator Interface section of this specification. E. Timed Override. A standard application shall be utilized to enable/disable temperature control when a user selects on/cancel at the zone sensor, workstation, or the operator display. The amount of time that the override takes precedence will be selectable from the workstation. F. Anti-Short Cycling. All binary output points shall be protected from short cycling. 2.5 SYSTEM CONTROLLERS A. General. Provide System Controllers to provide the performance specified in section 1 of this division. Each of these panels shall meet the following requirements. 1. The System Automation System shall be composed of one or more independent, standalone, microprocessor based System Controllers to manage the global strategies described in System software section. 2. The System Controller shall have sufficient memory to support its operating system, database, and programming requirements. 3. The controller shall provide a USB communications port for connection to a PC 4. The operating system of the Controller shall manage the input and output communications signals to allow distributed controllers to share real and virtual point information and allow central monitoring and alarms. 5. Controllers that perform scheduling shall have a real time clock. 6. Data shall be shared between networked System Controllers. 7. The System Controller shall utilize industry recognized open standard protocols for communication to unit controllers. 8. The System Controller shall continually check the status of its processor and memory circuits. If an abnormal operation is detected, the controller shall: a) Assume a predetermined failure mode. b) Generate an alarm notification. c) Create a retrievable file of the state of all applicable memory locations at the time of the failure. d) Automatically reset the System Controller to return to a normal operating mode. A. Communications. Each System Controller shall reside on the Enterprise wide network, which is same high-speed network as the workstations. The Enterprise wide network will be provided by the owner and supports the Internet Protocol (IP). Local connections of the System Controller shall be on ISO 8802-3 (Ethernet). B. Environment. Controller hardware shall be suitable for the anticipated ambient conditions. Controller used in conditioned ambient shall be mounted in an enclosure, and shall be rated for operation at -40 C to 50 C [-40 F to 122 F]. TracerSCGuideSpec-1.doc 6/10 7 C. Serviceability. Provide diagnostic LEDs for power, communications, and processor. The System Controller shall have a display on the main board that indicates the current operating mode of the controller. All wiring connections shall be made to field removable, modular terminal connectors. The System controller shall utilize standard DIN mounting methods for installation and replacement. D. Memory. The System Controller shall maintain all BIOS and programming information indefinitely without power to the System controller E. Immunity to power and noise. Controller shall be able to operate at 90% to 110% of nominal voltage rating and shall perform an orderly shut-down below 80% nominal voltage 2.6 CUSTOM APPLICATION CONTROLLERS A. General. Provide Custom Application Controllers to provide the performance specified in section 1 of this division. Each of these panels shall meet the following requirements. Refer to the control infrastructure on the mechanical plans for applicability. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. B. The Controller shall have sufficient memory to support its operating system, database, and programming requirements. Controllers that perform scheduling shall have a real time clock. The operating system of the Controller shall manage the input and output communications signals to allow distributed controllers to share real and virtual point information and allow central monitoring and alarms. The Controller shall continually check the status of its processor and memory circuits. If an abnormal operation is detected, the controller shall assume a predetermined failure mode, and generate an alarm notification. Custom application controllers shall communicate using LonTalk. Controllers shall use FTT-10 transceivers. All communications shall be with the use of LonMark-approved SNVTs. Environment. Controller hardware shall be suitable for the anticipated ambient conditions. 1. 2. Controller used in conditioned ambient shall be mounted in IP 20 type enclosures, and shall be rated for operation at 0 C to 50 C [32 F to 120 F]. Controllers used outdoors and/or in wet ambient shall be mounted within IP 56 type waterproof enclosures, and shall be rated for operation at -40 C to 70 C [-40 F to 158 F]. C. Serviceability. Provide diagnostic LEDs for power, communications, and processor. All low voltage wiring connections shall be made such that the controller electronics can be removed and/or replaced without disconnection of field termination wiring. D. Memory. The Controller shall maintain all BIOS and programming information in the event of a power loss for at least 72 hours. E. Immunity to power and noise. Controller shall be able to operate at 90% to 110% of nominal voltage rating and shall perform an orderly shutdown below 80% nominal voltage. 2.7 APPLICATION SPECIFIC CONTROLLERS A. General. Application specific controllers (ASC) are microprocessor-based DDC controllers, which through hardware or firmware design are dedicated to control a specific piece of equipment. They are not fully user programmable, but are customized for operation within the confines of the equipment they are designed to serve. Refer to the control infrastructure on the mechanical plans for applicability. TracerSCGuideSpec-1.doc 6/10 8 1. 2. B. Each ASC shall be capable of stand-alone operation and shall continue to provide control functions without being connected to the network. Each ASC will contain sufficient I/O capacity to control the target system. Environment. The hardware shall be suitable for the anticipated ambient conditions. 1. 2. Controller used in conditioned ambient spaces shall be mounted in IP 20 type rated enclosures. Controllers located where not to be disturbed by System activity (such as above ceiling grid), may be provided with plenum-rated enclosures and non-enclosed wiring connections for plenum cabling. All controllers shall be rated for operation at 0 C to 50 C [32 F to 120 F]. Controllers used outdoors and/or in wet ambient shall be mounted within IP 56 type waterproof enclosures, and shall be rated for operation at -40 C to 65 C [-40 F to 150 F]. C. Serviceability. Provide diagnostic LEDs for power and communications. All wiring connections shall be clearly labeled and made to be field removable. D. Memory. The Application Specific Controller shall maintain all BIOS and programming information in the event of a power loss for at least 90 days. E. Immunity to Power and noise. Controller shall be able to operate at 90% to 110% of nominal voltage rating and shall perform an orderly shutdown below 80%. F. Transformer. Power supply for the ASC must be rated at minimum of 125% of ASC power consumption, and shall be fused or current limiting type. G. Application Specific Controllers shall communicate using LonTalk. Controllers shall use FTT-10 transceivers. All communications shall follow LonMark profiles. ASCs which do not have a profile that applies must comply with LonMark standards, utilize SNVTs for all listed points, and be provided with a XIF file for self-documentation. 2.8 INPUT/OUTPUT INTERFACE A. Hard-wired inputs and outputs may tie into the system through System, Custom, or Application Specific Controllers. B. All input points and output points shall be protected such that shorting of the point to itself, another point, or ground will cause no damage to the controller. All input and output points shall be protected from voltage up to 24V of any duration, such that contact with this voltage will cause no damage to the controller. C. Binary inputs shall allow the monitoring of on/off signals from remote devices. The binary inputs shall provide a wetting current of at least 12 mA to be compatible with commonly available control devices. D. Pulse accumulation input points. This type of point shall conform to all the requirements of Binary Input points, and also accept up to 3 pulses per second for pulse accumulation, and shall be protected against effects of contact bounce and noise. E. Analog inputs shall allow the monitoring of low voltage (0-10 Vdc), current (4-20 ma), or resistance signals (thermistor, RTD). Analog inputs shall be compatible with, and field configurable to commonly available sensing devices. F. Binary outputs shall provide for on/off operation. Terminal unit and zone control applications may use 2 outputs for drive-open, drive-close (tri-state) modulating control. TracerSCGuideSpec-1.doc 6/10 9 G. Analog outputs shall provide a modulating signal for the control of end devices. Outputs shall provide either a 0-10 Vdc or a 4-20 ma signal as required to provide proper control of the output device. 2.9 AUXILIARY CONTROL DEVICES A. Motorized dampers and actuators shall be factory mounted at the rooftop unit. B. Temperature Sensors 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. C. Static Pressure Sensors 1. 2. 3. 4. D. 6. Safety low limit thermostats shall be vapor pressure type with an element 6m [20 ft] minimum length. Element shall respond to the lowest temperature sensed by any one foot section. Low limit shall be manual reset only. Relays 7. 8. F. Sensor shall have linear output signal. Zero and span shall be field-adjustable. Sensor sensing elements shall withstand continuous operating conditions plus or minus 50% greater than calibrated span without damage. Water pressure sensor shall have stainless steel diaphragm construction, proof pressure of 150 psi minimum. Sensor shall be complete with 4-20 ma output, required mounting brackets, and block and bleed valves. Mount in location accessible for service. Water differential pressure sensor shall have stainless steel diaphragm construction, proof pressure of 150 psi minimum. Over-range limit (DP) and maximum static pressure shall be 3,000 psi. Transmitter shall be complete with 4-20 ma output, required mounting brackets, and five-valve manifold. Mount in a location accessible for service. Low Limit Thermostats 5. E. Temperature sensors shall be Resistance Temperature Device (RTD) or Thermistor. Duct sensors shall be rigid or averaging as shown. Averaging sensors shall be a minimum of 5 feet in length. Immersion sensors shall be provided with a separable stainless steel well. Pressure rating of well is to be consistent with the system pressure in which it is to be installed. Space sensors shall be equipped with set-point adjustment, override switch, display, and/or communication port as shown on the drawings. Provide matched temperature sensors for differential temperature measurement. Differential accuracy shall be within 0.2 F. The space temperature, set point, and override confirmation will be annunciated by a digital display for each zone sensor. The set point will be selectable utilizing buttons. Control relays shall be UL listed plug-in type with dust cover. Contact rating, configuration, and coil voltage suitable for application. Time delay relays shall be UL listed solid-state plug-in type with adjustable time delay. Delay shall be adjustable plus or minus 200% (minimum) from set-point shown on plans. Contact rating, configuration, and coil voltage suitable for application. Provide IP 20 Type enclosure when not installed in local control panel. Transformers and Power Supplies 9. 10. Control transformers shall be UL listed, Class 2 current-limiting type, or shall be furnished with over-current protection in both primary and secondary circuits for Class 2 service. Unit output shall match the required output current and voltage requirements. Current output shall allow for a 50% safety factor. Output ripple shall be 70.0 mV maximum Peak- TracerSCGuideSpec-1.doc 6/10 10 11. 12. G. Current Switches 13. H. to-Peak. Regulation shall be 5% line and load combined, with 50 microsecond response time for 50% load changes. Unit shall have built-in over-voltage protection. Unit shall operate between 0 C and 50 C. Unit shall be UL recognized. Current-operated switches shall be self-powered, solid state with adjustable trip current. The switches shall be selected to match the current of the application and output requirements of the DDC system. LOCAL CONTROL PANELS 14. 15. 16. All indoor control cabinets shall be fully enclosed IP 20 Type construction with hinged door, and removable sub-panels or electrical sub-assemblies. Interconnections between internal and face-mounted devices shall be pre-wired with color-coded stranded conductors neatly installed in plastic troughs and/or tie-wrapped. Terminals for field connections shall be UL listed for 600-volt service, individually identified per control/interlock drawings, with adequate clearance for field wiring. Control terminations for field connection shall be individually identified per control drawings. Provide on/off power switch with over-current protection for control power sources to each local panel. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.0 SECTION INCLUDES: .1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6 .7 .8 .9 .10 .11 .12 .13 .14 .15 .16 Examination Protection General Workmanship Field Quality Control Wiring Fiber Optic Cable Installation of Sensors Flow Switch Installation Actuators Warning Labels Identification of Hardware and Wiring Controllers Programming Cleaning Training Acceptance 3.1 EXAMINATION A. The project plans shall be thoroughly examined for control device and equipment locations, and any discrepancies, conflicts, or omissions shall be reported to the Architect/Engineer for resolution before rough-in work is started. B. The contractor shall inspect the site to verify that equipment is installable as shown, and any discrepancies, conflicts, or omissions shall be reported to the Architect/Engineer for resolution before rough-in work is started. 3.2 PROTECTION A. The Contractor shall protect all work and material from damage by his/her work or workers, and shall be liable for all damage thus caused. TracerSCGuideSpec-1.doc 6/10 11 B. The Contractor shall be responsible for his/her work and equipment until finally inspected, tested, and accepted. The Contractor shall protect his/her work against theft or damage, and shall carefully store material and equipment received on site that is not immediately installed. The Contractor shall close all open ends of work with temporary covers or plugs during storage and construction to prevent entry of foreign objects. 3.3 GENERAL WORKMANSHIP A. Install equipment, piping, wiring/conduit parallel to System lines (i.e. horizontal, vertical, and parallel to walls) wherever possible. B. Provide sufficient slack and flexible connections to allow for vibration of piping and equipment. C. Install all equipment in readily accessible location as defined by chapter 1 article 100 part A of the NEC. Control panels shall be attached to structural walls unless mounted in equipment enclosure specifically designed for that purpose. Panels shall be mounted to allow for unobstructed access for service. D. Verify integrity of all wiring to ensure continuity and freedom from shorts and grounds. E. All equipment, installation, and wiring shall comply with acceptable industry specifications and standards for performance, reliability, and compatibility and be executed in strict adherence to local codes and standard practices. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. All work, materials and equipment shall comply with the rules and regulations of applicable local, state, and federal codes and ordinances as identified in Part 1 of this Section. B. Contractor shall continually monitor the field installation for code compliance and quality of workmanship. All visible piping and or wiring runs shall be installed parallel to System lines and properly supported. C. Contractor shall arrange for field inspections by local and/or state authorities having jurisdiction over the work. 3.5 WIRING A. All control and interlock wiring shall comply with the national and local electrical codes. B. Where Class 2 wires are in concealed and accessible locations including ceiling return air plenums, approved cables not in raceway may be used provided that: C. Circuits meet NEC Class 2 (current-limited) requirements. (Low-voltage power circuits shall be sub-fused when required to meet Class 2 current-limit.) D. All cables shall be UL listed for application, i.e., cables used in ceiling plenums shall be UL listed specifically for that purpose. E. Do not install Class 2 wiring in conduit containing Class 1 wiring. Boxes and panels containing high voltage may not be used for low voltage wiring except for the purpose of interfacing the two (e.g. relays and transformers). F. Where class 2 wiring is run exposed, wiring shall be run parallel along a surface or perpendicular to it, and bundled, using approved wire ties at no greater than 3 m [10 ft] intervals. Such bundled cable shall be fastened to the structure, using specified fasteners, at 1.5 m [5 ft] intervals or more often to achieve a neat and workmanlike result. TracerSCGuideSpec-1.doc 6/10 12 G. All wire-to-device connections shall be made at a terminal blocks or terminal strip. All wire-to wire connections shall be at a terminal block, or with a crimped connector. All wiring within enclosures shall be neatly bundled and anchored to permit access and prevent restriction to devices and terminals. H. Maximum allowable voltage for control wiring shall be 120V. If only higher voltages are available, the Control System Contractor shall provide step down transformers. I. All wiring shall be installed as continuous lengths, where possible. Any required splices shall be made only within an approved junction box or other approved protective device. J. Install plenum wiring in sleeves where it passes through walls and floors. Maintain fire rating at all penetrations in accordance with other sections of this specification and local codes. K. Size of conduit and size and type of wire shall be the design responsibility of the Control System Contractor, in keeping with the manufacturer's recommendation and NEC. L. Control and status relays are to be located in designated enclosures only. These relays may also be located within packaged equipment control panel enclosures. These relays shall not be located within Class 1 starter enclosures. M. Follow manufacturer's installation recommendations for all communication and network cabling. Network or communication cabling shall be run separately from other wiring. N. This Contractor shall terminate all control and/or interlock wiring and shall maintain updated (as-built) wiring diagrams with terminations identified at the job site. O. Flexible metal conduits and liquid-tight, flexible metal conduits shall not exceed 3' in length and shall be supported at each end. Flexible metal conduit less than 1/2" electrical trade size shall not be used. In areas exposed to moisture, including chiller and boiler rooms, liquid-tight, flexible metal conduits shall be used. 3.6 INSTALLATION OF SENSORS A. Install sensors in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. B. Mount sensors rigidly and adequate for the environment within which the sensor operates. C. Room temperature sensors shall be installed on concealed junction boxes properly supported by the wall framing. D. All wires attached to sensors shall be air sealed in their conduits or in the wall to stop air transmitted from other areas affecting sensor readings. E. Install duct static pressure tap with tube end facing directly down-stream of air flow. F. Sensors used in mixing plenums, and hot and cold decks shall be of the averaging type. Averaging sensors shall be installed in a serpentine manner horizontally across duct. Each bend shall be supported with a capillary clip. G. All pipe mounted temperature sensors shall be installed in wells. Install all liquid temperature sensors with heat conducting fluid in thermal wells. H. Wiring for space sensors shall be concealed in System walls. EMT conduit is acceptable within mechanical and service rooms. 3.7 CONTROLLERS TracerSCGuideSpec-1.doc 6/10 13 A. Provide a separate Controller for each major piece of HVAC equipment. A custom application controller may control more than one system provided that all points associated with that system are assigned to the same controller. Points used for control loop reset such as outside air or space temperature are exempt from this requirement. 3.8 PROGRAMMING A. Provide sufficient internal memory for the specified control sequences and trend logging. B. Point Naming: System point names shall be modular in design, allowing easy operator interface without the use of a written point index. C. Software Programming 1. D. Provide programming for the system as written in the specifications and adhere to the sequence strategies provided. All other system programming necessary for the operation of the system but not specified in this document shall also be provided by the Control System Contractor. Imbed into any custom-written control programs sufficient comment statements or inherent flow diagrams to clearly describe each section of the program. The comment statements shall reflect the language used in the sequence of operations. Operators' Interface 1. 2. 3. Standard Graphics. Provide graphics for each major piece of equipment and floor plan in the System. This includes each Chiller, Air Handler, VAV Terminal, Fan Coil, Boiler, and Cooling Tower. These standard graphics shall show all points dynamically as specified in the points list. The controls contractor shall provide all the labor necessary to install, initialize, start-up, and trouble-shoot all operator interface software and their functions as described in this section. This includes any operating system software, the operator interface database, and any third party software installation and integration required for successful operation of the operator interface. As part of this execution phase, the controls contractor will perform a complete test of the operator interface. E. Demonstration: A complete demonstration and readout of the capabilities of the monitoring and control system shall be performed. The contractor shall dedicate a minimum of 16 hours on-site with the Owner and his representatives for a complete functional demonstration of all the system requirements. This demonstration constitutes a joint acceptance inspection, and permits acceptance of the delivered system for on-line operation. 3.9 CLEANING A. This contractor shall clean up all debris resulting from his or her activities daily. The contractor shall remove all cartons, containers, crates, etc. under his control as soon as their contents have been removed. Waste shall be collected and placed in a location designated by the Construction Manager or General Contractor. B. At the completion of work in any area, the Contractor shall clean all of his/her work, equipment, etc., making it free from dust, dirt and debris, etc. C. At the completion of work, all equipment furnished under this Section shall be checked for paint damage, and any factory finished paint that has been damaged shall be repaired to match the adjacent areas. Any metal cabinet or enclosure that has been deformed shall be replaced with new material and repainted to match the adjacent areas. TracerSCGuideSpec-1.doc 6/10 14 3.10 ACCEPTANCE A. The control systems will not be accepted as meeting the requirements of Completion until all tests described in this specification have been performed to the satisfaction of both the Engineer and Owner. Any tests that cannot be performed due to circumstances beyond the control of the Contractor may be exempt from the Completion requirements if stated as such in writing by the Owner's representative. Such tests shall then be performed as part of the warranty. END OF SECTION - TracerSCGuideSpec-1.doc 6/10 15 SECTION 16000 - ELECTRICAL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Provide electrical systems including: 1. Power. 2. Switches 3. Receptacles. 4. Telecom wiring and connection devices 5. Low voltage wiring and equipment 6. Miscellaneous equipment, wiring, accessories, and components [7. Electro-mechanical grease separator under Kitchen 3-basin sink] B. Include primary service, transformers, distribution center, grounding, power and lighting panels, wiring, outlet boxes, receptacles, lighting fixtures, switches, conduits, and raceways, and all labor and materials necessary to provide and install a complete electrical system for all fixtures, devices, equipment, and components shown in these Drawings and described in these Specifications. C. Coordinate location of electrical outlets and other fixtures with Children of America, to avoid interference with furniture, cabinets, and other movable or semi-permanent components. D. Coordinate with the mechanical contractor, the wiring, power, control, protection, and circuiting of all mechanical equipment , including but not limited to pumps, valves, motors, sensors, temperature controllers, furnaces, air handlers, air conditioning condensers, exhaust fans, resistance heating equipment, outside air dampers, signaling and control equipment, and other mechanical equipment, whether lowvoltage or high-voltage for a complete HVAC and plumbing system, shown anywhere in these Drawings or described anywhere in these Specifications. Size wiring and circuits in accordance with codes. 1.02 REFERENCES 1.03 A. National Electrical Contractors Association (NECA): 1. NECA SI - Standard of Installation. B. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): 1. KS 1 - Enclosed Switches. 2. NEMA WD 1 - General Requirements for Wiring Devices. 3. NEMA WD 6 - Wiring Device -- Dimensional Requirements. C. National Electrical Testing Association (NETA): 1. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems. D. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 1. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. SUBMITTALS A. Submit for approval shop drawings, product data, fixture and equipment catalog cuts. 16000 - 1 CHILDREN OF AMERICA Issue Date 08-10-10 Version 2.0 ELECTRICAL 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with governing codes and regulations. Provide products of acceptable manufacturers which have been in satisfactory use in similar service for three years. Use experienced installers. Deliver, handle, and store materials in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. B. Arrangement of systems indicated on the drawings is diagrammatic, and indicates the minimum requirements for electrical work. Site conditions shall determine the actual arrangement of conduits, boxes, disconnects, and similar items. Take field measurements before fabrication and coordinate with other trades. Be responsible for accuracy of dimensions and layout, and compliance with all applicable codes and regulations. C. The installation shall comply with all laws of local regulating authorities, the regulations of the current edition of the National Electric Code, and with the rules of the local electrical utility company. D. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing Work of this Section with minimum 5 years documented experience. E. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. 2. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Incorporated as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. 1.05 BASIC ELECTRICAL METHODS A. Drawings are schematic and diagrammatic. Use judgment and care to install electrical Work to function properly and fit within building construction and finishes. Electrical conductors, conduit, components, not shown or specified, which are required for any device or system to produce a complete and operative system are required to be furnished and installed. B. Exact location of outlets are determined from dimension on Drawings, manufacturer's shop drawings, or as may be determined at Project Site. Do not scale Drawings for exact location of any item. Verify item mounting heights as required by project conditions prior to rough-in. C. Route conduits and wiring associated with new equipment and systems above ceilings, in chases, and concealed within building structure. D. Surface mounted raceways or conduit permitted only at locations specifically indicated on Drawings. E. Provide proper number of conductors and conduits or cables to provide operative system as indicated on Contract Documents. Do not regroup any feeder circuits, branch circuits, home runs, and alarms at any point, from that shown on Contract Documents. F. Branch and home run circuits are indicated as 2, 3, or 4 wire circuits unless otherwise noted. Do not connect two ungrounded conductors to same circuit breaker/fused switch in any panel. Circuit runs consist of a maximum of five conductors; 3 phase conductors, 1 neutral conductor, and 1 equipment ground conductor, unless otherwise noted. Do not 16000 - 2 CHILDREN OF AMERICA Issue Date 08-10-10 Version 2.0 ELECTRICAL splice branch circuit conductors in any panels, safety switches, or non-automatic circuit breakers in separate enclosures. G. Equipment, switches, devices, shown mounted on and/or adjacent to equipment, which if installed, would impair proper operation of any equipment, shall be removed and relocated by Contractor as required so equipment will function properly. Notify Architect immediately if any such condition exists. H. Seal and make permanently watertight penetrations by electrical raceways or equipment through ceilings, walls or floors. 1. Seal penetrations in fire rated walls and ceiling and non-fire rated ceilings, walls. I. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with equipment manufacturer's published torque tightening values for equipment connectors. Where manufacturer's torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to comply with tightening torques specified in UL 486A, and NFPA 70. J. Install equipment and materials to provide required maintenance and code working clearance for servicing and maintenance. Coordinate final location of concealed equipment and devices requiring access with final location of required access panels and doors. Allow required space for removal of parts that require replacement or servicing. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Conduit: Rigid galvanized metal conduit, intermediate metallic conduit, electrical metallic tubing for concealed interior raceways, flexible metal conduit (Greenfield), and rigid nonmetallic conduit as required. 1. Rigid conduit shall be General Electric or Republic. Thin wall (EMT) shall be General Electric or Republic. 2. Non-metallic conduit shall be Parnite, Phelps-Dodge, Anaconda or Circle. 3. Conduit fittings shall be Thomas Betts, Appleton, Steel City, or Cedney. 4. Connectors shall be Thomas Betts, Appleton, Steel City, or Cedney. 5. Flexible metal conduit (Greenfield) to be not more than 6-feet long. B. Boxes: Provide galvanized steel outlet, junction and pull boxes sized to meet requirements of National Electrical Code, or non-metallic (FS W-J-805). C. Exterior Boxes: NEMA FB 1, Type FD, cast aluminum. Provide gasketed cover by box manufacturer. Provide threaded hubs. D. Conductors and wiring: 600 volt insulation type THWN or THHN copper wiring for branch circuits. Conductors AWG No. 12 shall be solid. Conductors AWG No. 10 and larger stranded. Minimum conductor size AWG No. 12. Green ground conductor in all raceways. Other sizes as required by service intended. 1. Conductors shall be Phelps-Dodge, Columbia, Hatfield, Parnite, or Circle. 2. MC cable with Underwriter’s approval E. Wiring devices: Receptacles, lighting switches, ground fault receptacles, dimmers, data ports, telephone ports, and coverplates as required. 16000 - 3 CHILDREN OF AMERICA Issue Date 08-10-10 Version 2.0 ELECTRICAL 1. Switch boxes shall be of standard type galvanized or non-metallic (FSW-J-805) with covers as required. Use single, double or other multiple box sizes or combinations as needed. 2. Switches – Commercial Specification Grade, color White a. Single Pole Switch: Leviton Cat. No.1221-2 b. Double Pole Switch: Leviton Cat. No. 1222-2 c. Three-way Switch:. Leviton, Cat. No. 1223-2 3. Duplex Receptacles Commercial Specification Grade, Color White w/ White Cover Plates a. Standard Receptacles meeting UL 498; NEMA 5-20R (1) 20A 125V: Leviton Catalog No. BR20W Commercial Grade. b. GFIC Receptacles meeting ANSI C73, UL 943 Class A, NEMA 5-20R (1) 20A 1215V: Leviton Catalog No. 6899W Commercial Grade; Decora Style c. Child-Proof Receptacles meeting NEC 517-18(c) and NEMA 5-20R (1) 20A 125V: Leviton Catalog No. 8300 SGW Hospital Grade; Tamper Resistant; Decora Style 4. Telephone and data wall receptacles, color White, provide with multiple port wall receptacles coordinated to meet number of ports required by these specs and as shown on the Drawings. Use RJ45 connectors throughout, except use RJ11 connectors for Classroom telephones. Use Category 5e devices, for mounting in standard non-metallic switch boxes 5. Cover Plates - Color White. All receptacles, switches, dimmers, data ports and telephone ports to be provided with UL approved cover plates. Use studded cover plates for wall mounted telephones in Classrooms. Where two or more switches, outlets, or data ports are in the same location, or such combinations of switches, outlets, or data ports are in same locations, they shall be ganged and covered by a single plate of the proper gang, mix, and type. F. Provide electrical panelboards sized in accordance with National Electrical Code. Use only panelboards with copper bus bars. G. Transformers: dry type if required for interior. H. Mechanical Equipment: provide wiring, conduit, connections, components, devices, and accessories for complete connections to all mechanical equipment including but not limited to pumps, valves, motors, sensors, temperature controllers, furnaces, air handlers, air conditioning condensers, exhaust fans, resistance heating equipment, outside air dampers, signaling and control equipment and other mechanical equipment, whether low-voltage or high-voltage for a complete HVAC and plumbing system, shown anywhere in these Drawings or described anywhere in these Specifications. Size wiring and circuits in accordance with codes. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Install materials and systems in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and approved submittals. Install materials in proper relation with adjacent construction and 16000 - 4 CHILDREN OF AMERICA Issue Date 08-10-10 Version 2.0 ELECTRICAL with uniform appearance for exposed work. Coordinate with work of other sections. Comply with applicable regulations and building code requirements. B. Accessibility: All individual items of equipment and components shall be 100% accessible for repair, removal or replacement without functional impairment or dismantling of any adjoining major surfaces or assemblies. Each circuit protecting device shall be clearly marked and readily accessible. C. Markers: Each meter and its associated switch shall have a marker identifying the distribution panel it serves. The meter and the switch shall each have a panel. D. Sleeves: Passage of conduit through any masonry wall or concrete floors shall be provided with steel pipe sleeves. Sleeves shall extend 1/2" above the floor. Seal space between sleeve and conduit with oakum and waterproof mastic. All conduit 1-1/4" and larger, shall be sleeved. Any exposed conduit 3" or smaller passing through floors, ceilings, walls, casework surfaces, etc., in finished area, shall be fitted with nickelplated escutcheons of sufficient outside diameter to amply cover the sleeved opening and an inside diameter to closely fit the conduit around which it is installed. E Circuitry: Circuit numbers as shown on the drawings refer to the breaker numbers in the panel. Identification of the individual circuits shall be placed on the panel identification cards as shown on the drawings. The routing of circuits shall be within the scope of good engineering practice and all outlets and fixtures shall be on the same circuit number as shown on the drawings. Organize circuits by Rooms wherever possible. Clearly label circuit by Room Numbers and function. F. Concealment of Wiring and Equipment: All wiring shall be run in concealed spaces. The wiring shall be installed in strict compliance with applicable articles of the National Electric Code, and the rules of the local utility. All device boxes shall be installed recessed in walls and ceilings such that when the device plate or fixture is installed, there is no gap between it and the wall or ceiling surface. G. Cutting And Notching: All cutting, notching, and drilling shall be done within the limits set forth by metal framing manufacturer. Any member which has been cut or notched in excess of these limits, shall be repaired or replaced as directed by the Architect, at the Contractor’s expense. H. Run telecom cabling in neat, organized bundles using plenum-rated cabling. Support cabling in accordance with telecom industry standards. I. Test all systems for proper operation. Restore damaged finishes. Clean and protect work from damage. J. Entrance service grounding shall be in accordance with NEC 250.50, NEC 250.52 (A) (1), and NEC Table 250.66. K. Raceways passing from the interior to the exterior of the building shall be filled with an approved sealant or filler material to block and seal air passage and prevent condensation in raceways. Work shall comply with NEC 300.7 (A). 3.02 A. INSTALLATION OF OUTLETS AND SWITCHES Install Child-Proof receptacles in all areas, including but not limited to classroom, corridors, entry vestibule, isolation areas, foyer area and exterior building walls exposed 16000 - 5 CHILDREN OF AMERICA Issue Date 08-10-10 Version 2.0 ELECTRICAL to playground areas. On exterior childproof receptacles, protect these using remote GFIC circuit protection with GFIC circuit breakers in the panelboard. 3.03 B. Use integral GFIC receptacles at all wet areas, adjacent to plumbing fixtures, on all kitchen and kitchenette back walls, in adult toilet rooms, on all other exterior locations not accessible to children, and as otherwise required by building codes and NEC. D. Install wall switches 48" above finished floor. Locate switches within rooms at strike side of door. Install receptacles, data, and telephone ports not less than 15" above finished floor, measured to bottom of cover plate, unless noted otherwise (UNO). I. Install convenience ground fault (GFIC) duplex wall receptacles at 44" above countertop backsplashes in kitchens, kitchenettes and at other locations shown on the Drawings or required by the National Electric Code and other codes having jurisdiction. Coordinate mounting of receptacles to avoid interference of cover plates with other equipment, countertop, and backsplashes. J. All exterior weather-proof receptacles shall have integral ground fault (GFIC) protection for areas not accessible to children, and shall have remote ground fault (GFIC) protection for areas accessible to children, in addition to being child-proof receptacles as described above. Such receptacle shall be installed in approved weather-proof enclosures. Install exterior receptacles not less than 18" above grade. K. Use cast outlet box with weatherproof cover in exterior locations exposed to the weather. K. Gang-mount multiple switching locations. Mount multiple types of controls as close together as possible and in-line with each other at a height of 48" above finished floor. L together on wall in gang-type boxes. If gang box grouping is not possible, place individual boxes not more than 6" apart. Avoid back-to-back box locations. INSTALLATION OF TELECOM WIRING AND EQUIPMENT A. B. Required National Vendor: Telesystems (see vendor schedule) General Wiring: Install telecom wiring, consisting of multiple port telecom wall receptacles for data and telephone use, where shown on Drawings and connected with Category 5e (minimum) wiring in plastic wall conduit terminating each wall drop above ceiling into a sweep or bend. Home run wiring from all telecom receptacles, through wall conduit, to a height above the lay-in ceiling in organized bundle(s). Run bundles above lay-in ceiling to avoid electrical interference and in conformance with standard practice for routing network wiring. Extend network wiring to mechanical room and terminate at the telephone demarcation board with adequate surplus length to complete punch down connections to panel. Label each wiring bundle before making punch down connections to panel. 2. 3. 4. 5. Contractor shall home run all telecom cabling (data and telephone) to mechanical room plywood demarcation board. Patch cords, hubs, switches, and other network and telephone electronic equipment shall be supplied and installed by others. Patch cords from 48-port patch panel to electronic network and telephone equipment shall be provided and installed by others. Contractor shall make all connections of telecom wiring (data and telephone) to each wall receptacle, organized as described in Paragraphs below. 16000 - 6 CHILDREN OF AMERICA Issue Date 08-10-10 Version 2.0 ELECTRICAL 6. 7. Contractor shall label each connection at the patch panel and with a matching mark at the receptacle. Test all telecom connections at demarcation in Mechanical Room after completion of punch down. B. Telephone Wiring: A total of five (5) telephone lines will be brought to the telecom demarcation point by the local telephone service provider. The Contractor shall install telecom wiring from each telephone receptacle to the demarcation board patch panel organized as follows: C. Data Wiring: Run Category 5e or higher, 8-wire, 4-twisted pair computer data cables from each location noted below, and punch down to the telecom patch panel on the demarcation board in the Mechanical Room. 1. Run data cables from the following data wall receptacles to the patch panel: a. Reception Desk: Two (2) 8-wire, 4-twisted-pair cables b. Office: One (1) 8-wire, 4-twisted-pair cables c. Vestibule: One (1) 8-wire, 4-twisted-pair cables D. E. 3.04 Connectors: 1. Use RJ45 receptacles for all telecom wall receptacles unless otherwise noted or required for special equipment such as fire alarm control panel, utility dial-out equipment, and other special equipment. 2. Use RJ11 receptacles and steel cover plates with integral phone-support studs for wall mounted telephones in Classrooms. WIRING OF MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT A. Install equipment supplied by mechanical contractor including, but not limited to, time clocks, transformers, relays, outside air dampers, and other equipment.. B. Provide wiring to all electrical equipment and make connections to such equipment including, but not limited to: 1. Time clocks 2. Duct dampers and smoke dampers 3. Outside air dampers 4. Electrically actuated door hardware 5. Hot water recirculation pumps 6. Baseboard heaters 7. Unit heaters 8. Ceiling fans and exhaust fans 9. Kitchen equipment 10. Emergency alarm equipment 11. Sensors and signaling devices 12. All other equipment requiring electrical connection END OF SECTION 16000 - 7 CHILDREN OF AMERICA Issue Date 08-10-10 Version 2.0 ELECTRICAL SECTION 16510 - LIGHTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Provide lighting systems including: 1. Interior luminaires and accessories. 2. Exterior luminaires and accessories 3. Emergency lighting units 4. Exit Signs. 5. Ballasts 6. Lamps 7. Photocells 8. Time clocks 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with governing codes and regulations. Provide products of acceptable manufacturers which have been in satisfactory use in similar service for three years. Use experienced installers. Deliver, handle, and store materials in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. B. Location of lighting indicated on the drawings is diagrammatic, and indicates a minimum requirement. Site conditions may dictate minor differences in final location or arrangement of components. C. The installation shall comply with all laws of local regulating authorities, the regulations of the current edition of the National Electric Code, the [insert local or state building codes], and with the rules of the local electrical utility company. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit for approval shop drawings, product data, fixture and equipment catalog cuts. B. Submit for approval a complete site photometric analysis of proposed lighting fixtures including wallpacks, pole-mounted luminaires, soffit can lights, and other lighting. 1.04 EXTERIOR SITE LIGHTING INTENT A. Exterior site lighting for parking area shall be either provided by means of area lighting, wall-pack lighting, or existing ambient lighting to provide an average lighting over the parking lot of 1.5 footcandles. If ambient lighting levels create wide ranges in lighting levels and high contrasts in the parking area, additional lighting shall be provided to balance the ambient levels across the entire parking area for uniform illumination levels but shall not exceed 2.0 footcandles in any 100 square foot area. B. Coordinate with lighting supplier to provide a photometric study of lighting levels around the building and across the parking lot to assure a uniform level of lighting is provided. Submit with lighting submittals. 16500 - 1 CHILDREN OF AMERICA Issue Date 07-23-10 LIGHTING PART 2 - PRODUCTS REQUIRED NATIONAL ACCOUNT VENDOR 2.01 A. HERMITAGE LIGHTING Contact: Josh Smith at 615-843-3380 2.02 MATERIALS A. 2.03 Subject to compliance with project requirements, manufacturers offering Products which may be incorporated in the Work include the following: 1. Lightolier, Fall River, MA (508) 679-8131. www.lightolier.com 2. Visa Lighting, Milwaukee, WI (800) 788-VISA; www.visalighting.com 3. Pathway Lighting Products, Inc., Old Saybrook, CT (800) 342-0592; www.pathwaylighting.com. 4. Delux Custom Lighting, Inc, Bell Gardens, CA (562) 806-9671; www.deluxcustomlighting.com 5. ExeLine / GenlyteThomas, Union, NJ (908) 964-7000; www.exeline.com 6. WideLite / Genlyte Group, San Marcos, TX (512) 392-5921; www.widelite.com INTERIOR LUMINAIRES AND ACCESSORIES A. Type A Lithonia SP8 SERIES 1. Description: Recessed, 2 feet wide by 4 feet long fluorescent grid troffer. 2. Lens: Prismatic acrylic, A-12 pattern, 0.095 inches thick 3. Trim Type: Lay-in grid 4. Ballast: High Efficiency 5. Voltage: 120. 6. Lamps: (2) 32WT8 A. Type B Lithonia SP8 SERIES 1. Description: Recessed, 2 feet wide by 2 feet long fluorescent grid troffer. 2. Lens: Prismatic acrylic, A-12 pattern, 0.095 inches thick. 3. Trim Type: Lay-in grid 4. Ballast: High Efficiency 5. Voltage: 120. 6. Lamps: (2) 31WT8 C. Type C Lithonia LIF6 SERIES 1. Description: 6” Aperture Recessed Fluorescent Down-light. 2. Baffle: General Task 2. Lens: None, unless noted on plans. 3. Voltage: 120. 4. Lamps: M-volt D. Type D Pathway Lighting Conventry Series #AS8HF-213Q-E4-BHPL81SCLWH-TP 1. Description: Recessed 8” Aperture Horizontal Fluorescent Baffled 2 Lamp 2. Voltage: 120 3. Lamps: (2) Quad Tube 120/277 16500 - 2 CHILDREN OF AMERICA Issue Date 07-23-10 LIGHTING E. Type EM Lithonia QUANTUM SERIES ELM2 1. Description: Wall mounted emergency Lighting Unit. 2. Voltage: 120 3. Lamps: (2) 1.2 W Halogen 4. Connect to emergency backup. F. Type F Lithonia L232 MV 1. Description: 48” Industrial Strip Surface Mounted. 2. Voltage: 120 3. Lamps: (2) T8 Fluorescent 4. WGL: 48” base wireguard G. Type G Lithonia ELRG SERIES 1. Description: Recessed Gimbal emergency Lighting Unit 2. Voltage: 120 3. Lamps: N/A 4. Connect to emergency backup. H. Type J Lithonia ELA 6CS WP M12 1. Description: Single wall mounted exterior remote head. 2. Voltage: 5.4 3. Lamps: 144w I. Type L Lithonia MNS8 1 15LP 1. Description: 18” Mini Strip Light 2. Voltage: 120 3. Lamps: (1) T8 Fluorescent 4. Lens: DMNS815 5. Wall mounted above closet door. J. Type M Lithonia ASF1 42TRT WDF 1. Description: Surface Mounted compact fluorescent architectural floodlight 2. Voltage: 120 3. Lamps: 42W CFL 4. Finish: DWHG White K. Type OA Visa OW1320 Avatar-Metro 1. Description: Wall Mounted Decorative Wall Sconce-Midland Art. Paint Finish to be determined by Architect. 2. Voltage: 120 L. Type OB Lithonia WST SERIES 1. Description: Trapezoid Building Wall Mounted sconce. 2. Finish: DWHG textured White 2. Voltage: 120 16500 - 3 CHILDREN OF AMERICA Issue Date 07-23-10 LIGHTING M. Type XA Lithonia LHQM 1. Description: Wall Mounted LED Exit Unit Combo. 2. Voltage: 120 3. Face type: S – Stencil 4. Color: W – white 5. Faces: 3 6. Letter color: R – red 7. Options: HO – High output battery for use with ELA 6CS WP M12 N. Type XB Lithonia LQM EL N 1. Description: Ceiling Mounted LED double faced exit light. 2. Voltage: 120 3. Face type: S – Stencil 4. Color: W – white 5. Faces: 3 6. Letter color: R – red 7. Ni-cad battery 2.05 LAMPS A. Incandescent, Fluorescent, Compact Fluorescent, Metal Halide and High Intensity Discharge (HID) Lamp Manufacturers: 1. General Electric Company, Nela Park, OH (800) 435-2677. 2. Osram/Sylvania, Danvers, MA (800) 544-4828. 3. Philips Lighting Company, Somerset, NJ (800) 555-0050. 4. Venture Lighting International Solon, Ohio 44139 USA 800-451-2606 B. Lamp Types: As specified for luminaire. C. Reflector Lamp Beam Patterns: ANSI C78.379. D. Four foot long T8 and U-bend T8 linear fluorescent lamps shall have a mercury content of less than 20 ppm. E. NEMA CFQ designated lamps and Halogen PAR lamps must pass the federal Toxic Characteristic Leaching Procedure (TCLP) test and be classified non-hazardous waste. 2.06 ELECTRONIC A. FLUORESCENT LAMP BALLASTS Description: High frequency, energy efficient, electronic fluorescent lamp ballasts with high power factor suitable and compatible for operating the lamps indicated. The lamp crest factor shall measure 1.7 or less. Ballasts shall have a minimum "Ballast Factor" of 0.85. Ballasts shall meet or exceed all EMI and RFI standards of the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) regulations Part 18 (including 15J). Ballasts shall be UL labeled and comply with all local, State and Federal efficiency standards. B. Manufacturers: 1. Advance Transformer Company, Rosemont, IL (847) 390-5000. 16500 - 4 CHILDREN OF AMERICA Issue Date 07-23-10 LIGHTING 2. Motorola, Lake Zurich, IL (800) 654-0089. 3. Magnetek, Nashville, TN (615) 316-5100. 4. Osram/Sylvania, Danvers, MA (800) 544-4828. 5. Lightolier Electronic Ballasts when used in Lightolier fixtures 2.07 C. Voltage 120 volts to match luminaire voltage. D. Warranty: Minimum five (5) year ballast warranty. ELECTRONIC HIGH INTENSITY DISCHARGE (HID) BALLASTS A. Description: Low frequency, energy efficient, electronic metal halide high-intensity discharge ballasts for operating the lamps indicated. Ballasts shall have a minimum Ballast Factor of BF=1.0±5%; a Power Factor of at least 90%; THD less than 15%. Ballasts shall meet or exceed all EMI and RFI standards of the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) regulations Part 18 (including 15J). Ballasts shall be UL labeled and comply with all local, State and Federal efficiency standards: B. Manufacturers: 1. DynaVision by Advance Transformer Company, Rosemont, IL (847) 390-5000. 2. General Electric Company, Nela Park, OH (800) 435-2677. 3. Magnetek. 4. Osram/Sylvania, Danvers, MA (800) 544-4828. C. Voltage: 120 volts to match luminaire voltage. D. Warranty: Minimum five (5) year ballast warranty. 2.08 ACCESSORIES A. Time Switches (Time Clocks): 1. 24 hour mechanical time switch, Model T101 by Intermatic Inc. Spring Grove, IL 60081 B. Photocells: 1. Photo controller relay unit, Model K1121 by Intermatic Inc. Spring Grove, IL 60081. Use not more than one (1) photocell unit per 1800 ballast wattage. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Install materials and systems in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and approved submittals. Install materials in proper relation with adjacent construction and with uniform appearance for exposed work. Coordinate with work of other sections. Comply with applicable regulations and building code requirements. B. Install suspended luminaires and exit luminaire signs using pendants supported from swivel hangers or in accordance with details shown on drawings. Provide pendant length required to suspend luminaire at indicated height 16500 - 5 CHILDREN OF AMERICA Issue Date 07-23-10 LIGHTING C. Support recessed fluorescent fixtures 2 foot x 2 foot and larger using a minimum of four wire hangers of same gauge as ceiling suspension system supported from building structure independent of ceiling framing. D. Locate recessed ceiling luminaires as indicated on reflected ceiling plan. E. Install surface mounted luminaires and exit luminaire signs plumb and adjust to align with building lines and with each other. Secure to prevent movement. Mount exit signs to outlet box mounted flush in wall or ceilings. Outlet box for ceiling mounted exit signs: Connect to rigid conduit system. F. Install recessed luminaires to permit removal from below. G. Install accessories furnished with each luminaire. H. Connect luminaires, emergency lighting units and exit luminaire signs to separate branch circuits using minimum 1/2 inch (12 mm) flexible metal conduit whips maximum 5 feet in length. I. Bond products and metal accessories to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor. J. Install specified lamps in each emergency lighting unit, exit luminaire sign, and luminaire. 3.02 EXTERIOR LIGHT FIXTURES 3.03 A. All exterior wall pack lighting, soffit can lights, and pole-mounted area lights shall be controlled by photocell and time-clock. Drawings indicate Circuits for power source only, and should not be interpreted as indicating any form of switching or controls. B. Mount wall pack (WP-1) light fixtures at a height 9’-4” to the top of the fixture above finished floor elevation. Coordinate final location with location of downspouts and other wall-mounted components. C. Provide appropriate glare shields on wall-packs and pole-mounted area light fixtures as required by local jurisdiction and zoning rules. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Operate each luminaire after installation and connection. Inspect for improper connections and operation. B. Measure illumination levels to verify conformance with layout and performance requirements. C. Take measurements during night sky, without moon or with heavy overcast clouds effectively obscuring moon. END OF SECTION 16500 - 6 CHILDREN OF AMERICA Issue Date 07-23-10 LIGHTING SECTION 17000 - APPLIANCE SCHEDULE PART 1- GENERAL SUMMARY AP-1 REFRIGERATOR TRUE MFG #TS-23 300 SERIES S/S SOLID DOOR AP-2 FREEZER TRUE MFG #TS-23F 300 SERIES S/S SOLID DOOR AP-3 CONVECTION OVEN CADCO LTD #XAF-193 (W/ #XR-190 OVEN STAND AP-4 MICROW AVE UNIT SHARP R-21 JCA (1.0 CU. FT. W HITE) AP-4 MICROW AVE UNIT GE JEM25DMWW (W /JXA019K HANGING KIT) AP-6 REFRIGERATOR GE GTH18HCCWW (W /ICEMAKER) AP7- WASHER/DRYER COMBO GE GTUP24EMWW (W HITE) NOTES: MAKE SURE TO CHECK IF LOCAL AGENCIES REQUIRE APPLIANCES TO MEET N.S.F STANDARDS.
